Katalog Elmark 2013 WEB6

ELMARK Has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of the international
company ELMARK HOLDING SC. Our company is licensed for the manufacture of the full range of professional lowvoltage electrical equipment, lighting products and installation products. The Headquarters of ELMARK HOLDING SC are situated in Varna, Bulgaria. There is our logistics center which coordinates our activities in Europe and worldwide. As a member-company of our holding, ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC is controlling the production, while ELEKTROMARKET GRUP EOOD - Bulgaria, ELEKTROMARKET IMPORT-EXPORT SRL-Romania, ELEKTROMARKET GRUP DOO Serbia, ELEKTROMARKET GRUPA DOO Croatia, ELEKTROMARKET GRUP KFT Hungary, ELEKTROMARKET GRUP EPE Greece, manage our trade activities in the respective countries. Our plant in Europe is situated in Bulgaria on an area of 10 000 sq.m. In its warehouse we keep on hand large quantities of all products, presented in the technical catalogue. Right from here we distribute the goods for Europe and worldwide. There is and adjacent modern warehouse building, covering 5000 sq.m., which enables us to keep large stocks to better meet the demands of our multiple clients. The management and the quality control of the products we produce are guaranteed by the ISO 9001:2000 certificates, complete Test for certificates for CE marking in accordance with Directive 73/23 EEC and ROHS (Restriction of hazardous Substances) certificates which guarantee the absence of any substances hazardous to the people and the environment. The full three-year warranty period is an additional proof of the quality of the ELMARK products. It is further accompanied by a special international insurance, which guarantees the coverage of damages which may occur as a result from an action or inaction of our products. ELMARK HOLDING SC is represented by distributing companies in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Montenegro, Portugal, Macedonia, Belgium, The Netherlands, Poland, Slovenia and Jordan. Our successful trade policy is due to the high quality of the product range and the successful balance of supply and demand of electrical equipment on competitive prices. As a result, ELMARK HOLDING SC has been a trustworthy and desired partner on the European and world market for twelve years.
CONTENT
CERTIFICATES CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) 60N Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N) Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers Switch disconnectors ISS 63100A series Isolating switches ISS2 125800A series Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A electronic type (MCCB) Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB) High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES

Residual current devices JEL 2, JL 1 / JEL 1A Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JL5 (RCD) Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device Surge arresters SPD type
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors LT 1 D/K Low voltage contactors LT 1 - F Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43 Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx Auxiliary contact blocks Module contactors K series
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION

Complex compensating devices Capacitor batteries and cos regulator Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor 2 Metal boxes
6 14 16 17 19 21 22 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 34 35 38 40 42 44 48 49 51 54 56 61 62 63 64 65 67 68 70 71 72 73
CONTENT
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF EL. MOTORS

Thermal relays Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2/TM 3 Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2/TM 3 Starters for direct start Star/delta starter Reverse starters ELM 1000 frequency inverters Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters ELM 2500 soft starter
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES

Programmable timers Digital counters Industrial Relays Current measurement transformers Devices for temperature measurement Displaying measurement devices
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL

Limit switches Proximity sensor Capacitive sensors Photoelectrical sensors Float switches Power supplies Rotary switches Buttons and LED indicators Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail Devices for telpher control Warning lights and towers Security sensors
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Bases for high power safety devices Fuse links for high power safety devices Isolating switches Switch disconnector Bell for DIN rail
74 76 78 80 81 83 85 86 88 89 90 92 96 98 100 102 103 106 108 114 115 116 117 117 118 122 126 127 128 130 132 132 133 135 136 137
CONTENT
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

Rhyme Splendor Life style Cable Trunkings and frames for Splendor and Rhyme Series Waterproof switches and sockets Frames and installation boxes for switches and sockets Waterproof junction boxes
138 140 142 144 146 150 154 155 156 158 159 160 161 163 164 166 167 170 173 174 176 178 180 186 188 190 191 194 200 202 207
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS

Industrial plugs Fixed industrial plugs Fixed industrial sockets for surface mounting Movable industrial sockets for surface mounting Industrial sockets for flush mounting
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Distribution boxes with industrial sockets Plastic distribution boxes Metal distribution boxes Plastic distribution board
CABLE TERMINALS
Connection tubes Cable terminals without insulation Insulated cable terminals
ACCESSORIES
Voltage transformers German type socket for din rail mounting Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers Consumatives Heat shrinkage tubes Terminal blocks Cable ties 4
CONTENT
TOOLS
Manual meters Crimping tools Mechanical cutting tools Pliers VDE Pliers VDE Screwdrivers Screwdrivers Bit holders Bits Ratchets Socket sets Sockets Wrenches Spanners Hex key sets Bit sets Saws Hammers Snap off knives Measuring tools
208 210 216 222 224 228 229 230 232 233 238 239 240 242 243 246 247 248 249 250 251
Certificates of the trade companies Bulgaria, Romania, Serbia
CERTIFICATE
IQNet and Quality Austria hereby certify that the organization
ELMARK GROUP d.o.o

Srbija, 34000 Kragujevac, Drage Todorovi 4
Scope of application: wholesale of electrical equipment
has implemented and maintains a
Quality Management System

which fulfills the requirements of the following standard
ISO 9001:2000
Issued on: Validity date: QA certified since: Registration Number: 2007-03-26 2010-03-16 2007-03-17
AT-05844/0
President of IQNet
Ren Wasmer
President of OQS
Viktor Seitschek
IQNet is represented in the USA by: AFAQ AFNOR, AIB-Vinotte International, CISQ, DQS, NSAI Inc., QMI and SAI Global * The list of IQNet partners is valid at the time of issue of this certificate. Updated information is available under www.iqnet-certification.com
IQNet Partners*: AENOR Spain AFAQ AFNOR France AIB-Vinotte International Belgium ANCE Mexico APCER Portugal CISQ Italy CQC China CQM China CQS Czech Republic Cro Cert Croatia DQS Germany DS Denmark ELOT Greece FCAV Brazil FONDONORMA Venezuela HKQAA Hong Kong China ICONTEC Colombia IMNC Mexico Inspecta Certification Finland IRAM Argentina JQA Japan KFQ Korea MSZT Hungary Nemko AS Norway NSAI Ireland PCBC Poland QMI Canada Quality Austria Austria RR Russia SAI Global Australia SII Israel SIQ Slovenia SIRIM QAS International Malaysia SQS Switzerland SRAC Romania TEST St Petersburg Russia YUQS Serbia
ISO certificates of ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC
ROHS certificates
LVD certificates for compliance with Directive 2006/95/EC (ex-73/23/EEC) Low Voltage Directives Issued by the Center for Testing and European Certification Ltd. An EU Notified Body, registered by NANDO (New Approach Notified and Designated Organization) 1871, http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/newapproach/nando
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Bosnia and Herzegovina
10
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Serbia
11
Certificate of Compliance GOST
12
Certificate for international insurance in Alliance IRIND
13
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60
TERMINAL NON-FLAMMABLE COVER JUMP KNUCKLE HANDLE LOCK KNACKLE MOVABLE CONTACT ARC CHAMBER STATIC CONTACT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory) UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory) SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
2 8
7 9
6
Characteristics
10
11
12
Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect electrical circuits from damage caused by overload or short circuit. They can also be used as devices for commutation and control of electrical circuits. They differ in the following characteristics: * Operating voltage: 230, 400V * Number of poles: 1, 2, 3, 4 * Breaking curve: - curve B breaks between 3 and 5 In, used for low voltage short circuit currents (long circuits and generators) - curve C breaks between 5 and 10 In, used for protection of main power supply cables and conventional consumers - curve D breaks between 10 and 20 In, used for protection of industrial consumers with high initial current flow (electric motors) * Breaking capacity: 4.5, 6, 10kA
16
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

4xN Cx
constructive series number of poles (1;2;3;4) rated current breaking curve
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2
Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in housing and industrial buildings - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m - allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 4500 A Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating voltage:2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000 * Mechanical (number of cycles): 20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: B curve the overload and short-circuit protection is activated at 3-5 ln. Used for protection of big length cables and power generators. C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180m - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm - bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm - flexible conductors up to 16 mm * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious interference * ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C
Recommended sections of the condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)
Type
Rated current Breaking capacity In (A) (kA)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number Curve C
Catalogue number Curve B
C41N / 2A C41N / 4A C41N / 6A C41N / 10A C41N / 16A C41N / 20A C41N / 25A C41N / 32A C41N / 40A C41N / 50A C41N / 63A
2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
41460 41461 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41459
41460B 41461B 41451B 41452B 41453B 41454B 41455B 41456B 41457B 41458B 41459B
17
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
C42N / 6A C42N / 10A C42N / 16A C42N / 20A C42N / 25A C42N / 32A C42N / 40A C42N / 50A C42N / 63A
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120
41470 41471 41472 41473 41474 41475 41476 41477 41478
41470B 41471B 41472B 41473B 41474B 41475B 41476B 41477B 41478B
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
C43N / 6A C43N / 10A C43N / 16A C43N / 20A C43N / 25A C43N / 32A C43N / 40A C43N / 50A C43N / 63A
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80
41541 41542 41543 41544 41545 41546 41547 41548 41549
41541B 41542B 41543B 41544B 41545B 41546B 41547B 41548B 41549B
C40N, curve B
C40N, curve C
18
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) 60N
6xN Cx
constructive series number of poles (1;2;3;4) rated current breaking curve
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1
72 50
Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in industrial buildings with high contamination level of the electric system - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m - allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating voltage:2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 8000 * Mechanical (number of cycles): 50000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: B the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and generators C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of 1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with additional coating * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance Status indicator * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s Heat resistance of internal non-electrical components: 850 / 10 s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180m - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm - bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm - flexible conductors up to 16 mm * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious interference * ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C
Type Rated current Breaking In (A) capacity (kA) Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2) Catalogue number Curve C Catalogue number Curve B
35
81
45
C61N / 1A C61N / 2A C61N / 4A C61N / 6A C61N / 10A C61N / 16A C61N / 20A C61N / 25A C61N / 32A C61N / 40A C61N / 50A C61N / 63A
1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
41100N 41102N 41104N 41106N 41110N 41116N 41120N 41125N 41132N 41140N 41150N 41163N
41501N 41502N 41504N 41506N 41510N 41516N 41520N 41525N 41532N 41540N 41550N 41563N
19
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) 60N
Type
Rated current Breaking In (A) capacity (kA)
Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)
C62N / 2 C62N / 4A C62N / 6A C62N / 10A C62N / 16A C62N / 20A C62N / 25A C62N / 32A C62N / 40A C62N / 50A C62N / 63A
2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120
41202N 41204N 41206N 41210N 41216N 41220N 41225N 41232N 41240N 41250N 41263N
41602N 41604N 41606N 41610N 41616N 41620N 41625N 41632N 41640N 41650N 41663N
Type
C63N/2A C63N/4A C63N / 6A C63N / 10A C63N / 16A C63N / 20A C63N / 25A C63N / 32A C63N / 40A C63N / 50A C63N / 63A
2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80
41302N 41304N 41306N 41310N 41316N 41320N 41325N 41332N 41340N 41350N 41363N
41702N 41704N 41706N 41710N 41716N 41720N 41725N 41732N 41740N 41750N 41763N
Type
C64N / 2A C64N / 4A C64N / 6A C64N / 10A C64N / 16A C64N / 20A C64N / 25A C64N / 32A C64N / 40A C64N / 50A C64N / 63A
2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
C60N, curve B
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60
41402N 41404N 41406N 41410N 41416N 41420N 41425N 41432N 41440N 41450N 41463N
C60N, curve C
41802N 41804N 41806N 41810N 41816N 41820N 41825N 41832N 41840N 41850N 41863N
20
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L
100L Cx
constructive series number of poles (1;3) rated current breaking curve
Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating volatage:2000V, 1 min at impulse wave 1.2/50s * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * possibility for labeling
Rated current Breaking capacity In (A) (kA) Recommended sections of the condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2) Catalogue number Curve C
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
C101L/6A C101L/10A C101L/16A C101L/20A C101L/25A C101L/32A C101L/40A C101L/50A C101L/63A
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
41101 41103 41105 41107 41108 41109 41111 41112 41113
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

6/120 6/120 6/120 6/120 6/120 6/120 6/120 6/120 6/120
41201 41203 41205 41207 41208 41209 41211 41212 41213

Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80
41301 41303 41305 41307 41308 41309 41311 41312 41313
21
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M
100M Dx
constructive series number of poles (1;2;3;4) rated current breaking curve , D
Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating volatage:2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C,D * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 148 to 230m - welding effort: <400 N/ - bimetal plate composition: TB180/0.5 - thickness: 0.8mm - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: 20N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 6x6x1 - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar - rigid conductors up to 50 - flexible conductors up to 35 * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * possibility for labeling * for mounting in industrial environment * ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C
Type
Number of poles
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number Curve D
C100M C100M C100M
1P 1P 1P
80 100 125
10 10 10
9 / 180 9 / 180 9 / 180
41180 41190 41195
41180D 41190D 41195D
22
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M
Type
Number of poles
Packing/Box (pcs)
C100M C100M
2P 2P
80 100
10 10
6 / 120 6 / 120
41280 41290
41281 41291
Type
Number of poles
Packing/Box (pcs)
C100M C100M
3P 3P
80 100
10 10
4 / 60 4 / 60
41380 41390
41381 41391
Type
Number of poles
Packing/Box (pcs)
C100M C100M
4P 4P
80 100
10 10
3 / 60 3 / 60
41480 41490
41481 41491
(C curve)
t(s) 1000 5000 2000 1000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0.005 0.002 0.001 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in 1000 5000 t(s)
(D curve)
2000 1000 500 200 100 50 20 10
Thermal release
Thermal release
Electromagnetic release
5 2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0.005 0.002 0.001 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in
Electromagnetic release
23
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series
60xDC Cx
constructive series number of poles (1;2) rated current breaking curve
Functions: - for lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer protection - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating current and constant current power supply circuits - for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in industrial buildings - for protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current power supply Technical data: * Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC * Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu * Insulating voltage: 2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 20000 * Class of current limiting: 3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180m - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm - bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) - metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc * Conducting: - power supply busbar 1P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm - flexible conductors up to 16 mm * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm Mounting * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious current interference * Ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C
24
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
61DC / 1A 61DC / 2A 61DC / 4A 61DC / 6A 61DC / 10A 61DC / 16A 61DC / 20A 61DC / 25A 61DC / 32A 61DC / 40A 61DC / 50A
72 65 49
1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
41164 41165 41166 41167 41168 41169 41170 41171 41172 41173 41174 41175
61DC / 63A
36 18
78
45
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
62DC / 2A 62DC / 4A 62DC / 6A 62DC / 10A 62DC / 16A 62DC / 20A 62DC / 25A
2 4 6 10 16 20 25
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0
6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120
41176 41177 41178 41179 41181 41182 41183
25
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N)
Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead conductor Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A * Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu * Insulating voltage: 2000V * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - power supply busbar DP1N - flexible or rigid conductor * Mounting: on DIN-rail
Circuit breakers DP1N (1P+N) - SIGMA design

Type Rated current Breaking capacity In (A) (kA) Recommended sections of the condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2) Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number Curve C
DP1N / 6 DP1N / 10 DP1N / 16 DP1N / 20 DP1N / 25 DP1N / 32
6 10 16 20 25 32
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
41006 41010 41016 41020 41025 41032
26
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers

Combined voltage circuit-breaker N2 Functions: - when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off - when the voltage is increased above 270V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off - allows manual turning on of the switch after powering is restored - indication of the position of the device Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Insulation voltage: 2000V * Protection ratio: IP>20 Connection method: * Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector * Feeding (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical, by means of two pins attached to the rivets of the circuit-breaker, while the operating mechanism is connected to the switching off mechanism of the circuit breaker after the sealing lid is demounted
Type Rated voltage Type breaker Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
Type designation: N - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1
ELMARK MN 2 60
230V
60
12 / 240
41909
Type designation: X - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1
Shunt release MX (independent release) Functions: - remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed - allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery - indication of the devices location Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * IP code: IP>20 Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker Mounting: * vertical, clamps with two pins to the breakers rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
ELMARK MX 60
230V
60
12 / 240
41902
Auxiliary contact OF Functions: -at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system -indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Ingress protecting rating: IP>20 Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm Mounting: * vertical, clamps with two pins to breakers rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover Type designation: OF - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1
ELMARK OF 60 ELMARK SD100
230V 230V
60 C100M
12 / 240 12 / 240
41901 41905
27
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Switch disconnectors ISS 63100A series
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-3 and IEC947-3
Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits - can be used as a main breaker Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible conductors * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * Isolating voltage: 500V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: DIN-rail * Plastic material of UV rays * Ambient temperature: -20C + 55C
Number of poles Rated current In (A) Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)
Type
ISS ISS ISS ISS
1P 1P 1P 1P
40 63 80 100
10 16 25 35
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
41914 41911 41912 41913
Type
Number of poles
Rated current In (A)
Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)
ISS ISS ISS ISS
2P 2P 2P 2P
40 63 80 100
10 16 25 35
6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120
41924 41921 41922 41923
Type
Number of poles
ISS ISS ISS ISS
3P 3P 3P 3P
40 63 80 100
10 16 25 35
4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80
41934 41931 41932 41933
Type
Number of poles
ISS ISS ISS ISS
4P 4P 4P 4P
40 63 80 100
10 16 25 35
3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60
41944 41941 41942 41943
28
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Isolating switches ISS2 125800A series
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection. Functions: - switching on and off of electrical circuits under load - disconnection of electrical circuits - used as main circuit-breaker - resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit - it has no protective function Technical features: * Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz * Double connector: screw connection * Connection: solid or flexible conductors * Insulation voltage: 1000V * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 * Protection ratio: IP>20 * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts * Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays * Ambient temperature: -2040
Type
Dimensions A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y
ISS2-125/3 ISS2-125/4 ISS2-160/3 ISS2-160/4 ISS2-250/3 ISS2-250/4 ISS2-400/3 ISS2-400/4 ISS2-630/3 ISS2-630/4 ISS2-800/3 ISS2-800/4
140 170 140 170 180 230 230 295 230 295 378 498
135 135 135 135 170 170 240 240 260 260 312 312
125 125 125 125 138 138 165 165 165 165 240 240
27 27 27 27 35 35 50 50 50 50 50 50
73 73 73 73 86 86 110 110 110 110 140 140
120 150 120 150 160 210 210 275 210 275 353 473
120 150 120 150 160 210 210 275 210 275 353 473
65 65 65 65 90 90 140 140 140 140 175 175
20 20 20 20 25 25 32 32 40 40 60 60
25 25 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 50 56 56
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5 5 6 6 8 8
25 25 25 25 25 25 37 37 37 37 48 48
Type
Maximum Tightening mo- Packing/Box Catalogue number Catalogue number Rated current In (A) breaking capacity ment (Nm) (pcs) three-pole four-pole Icu (A)
ISS2-125in ISS2-125out ISS2-160in ISS2-160out ISS2-250in ISS2-250out ISS2-400in ISS2-630in ISS2-800in
125 125 160 160 250 250 400 630 800
1250 1250 1250 1250 2000 2000 3200 4000 1000
6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 10 10 14.5 14.5 27
1 / 12 1 / 12 1 / 12 1 / 12 1/6 1/6 1/2 1/2 1/2
41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 41958 41959
41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 41966 41967 41968 41969
Note:
ISS2-xxx in load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board ISS2 -xxx out load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board
29
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, manual switching between two power supplies or switching ON of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection. Functions: - switching on and off of low voltage electrical circuits under load - disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of the power supplies, while providing immediately switching to the other - used as main switch - resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit - it has no protective function Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz * Double connector: screw connection * Connection: hard or flexible conductors * Insulation voltage: 1000V * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 * Protection ratio: IP>20 * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts * Plastic resistant to UV rays * Ambient temperature: -2040 * Option for moving the handle on the front panel of the board * Small size * Indication which of the two supplies is operating
Type
Dimensions A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y Y
Q2M-160/3 EQ2M-160/4 Q2M-250/3 EQ2M-250/4 Q2M-400/3 EQ2M-400/4 Q2M-630/3 EQ2M-630/4 Q2M-8003 EQ2M-800/4
270 300 307 357 372 432 372 432 372 432
135 135 170 170 240 240 240 240 240 240
212 212 260 260 297 297 297 297 297 297
89 104 110 135 150 180 150 180 150 180
150 150 180 180 236 236 236 236 236 236
120 150 160 210 210 275 210 275 210 275
65 65 65 65 77 77 77 77 77 77
95 95 115 115 180 180 180 180 180 180
20 20 25 25 32 32 40 40 60 60
25 25 30 30 40 40 50 50 56 56
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5 5 6 6 8 8
55 55 70 70 83 83 83 83 83 83
25 25 25 25 37 37 37 37 48 48
Type
Maximum Rated current Tightening mobreaking capacIn (A) ment (Nm) ity Icu (A)
Packing/Box Catalogue number Catalogue number (pcs) three-pole four-pole
Q2M-160 Q2M-250 Q2M-400 Q2M-630 Q2M-800
160 250 400 630 800
1250 2000 3200 4000 1000
6.5 10 14.5 14.5 27
1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
44641 44642 44643 44644 44645
44641P 44642P 44643P 44644P 44645P
30
CIRCUIT BREAKERS High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
13
14 13
15
16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
COVER TERMINALS NON-FLAMABLE BASE STATIC CONTACTS PART FROM THE COVER SCREWS FOR TERMINALS ARC CHAMBERS ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory) REMOTE CONTROL electrical (accessory) AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory) SHUNT RELEASE (accessory) REMOTE CONTROL manual (accessory)
31
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2
H H1
e d
A W1 W
Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the breakers up to 160A and a bolt connection for the breakers from 250A to 1600A * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Plastic elements - not keeping the burning material nylon PA66 - box permitivity strength: >16MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C * Static contacts alloy: pure copper T2Y2 - contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) - thickness: depends on the current * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -2055
L2
L1
Type
Overall dimensions (mm) W L H L1 H1 A B
Installation dimensions (mm) W1 L2 d e
DS1-125 DS1-160 DS1-250 DS1-400 DS1-630 DS1-800 DS1-1600
76.2 90 105 140 210 210 210
120 120 170 257 275 275 410
70 70 104 104 104 104 140 238 316 310 347 410
90 93 143.5 144 172 172 210
25 30 35 44 70 70 70
100 100 139 214 230 230 300
50 60 70 87.5 140 140 140 210 285 280 307 350
4 5 6 6 6 6 10 8.5 11 11 16 12
Type
Operating Rated curbreaking capacrent In (A) ity (kA) Ics
Maximum breaking capacity Section of the Thermal current Packing/Box () Icu conductor adjustment (A) (pcs) 400V 690V (mm2)
Catalogue number
DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125
40 50 63 80 100 125
16 16 16 16 16 16
25 25 25 25 25 25
10 10 10 10 10 10
fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed
16 16 25 25 35 50
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
44040 44050 44063 44080 44090 44125
32
Type
Catalogue number
DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160
63 80 100 125 160
22 22 22 22 22
35 35 35 35 35
15 15 15 15 15
44 - 63 56 - 80 70 - 100 88 - 125 112 - 160
25 25 50 50 70
1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16
44163 44164 44165 44166 44160
Type
Catalogue number
DS1 - 250 DS1 - 250
200 250
35 35
50 50
15 15
140 - 200 175 - 250
120 120
1/6 1/6
44200 44250
Type
Catalogue number
DS 1 - 400 DS 1 - 400
315 400
50 50
65 65
25 25
fixed fixed
240 240
1/3 1/3
44315 44401
Type
Catalogue number
DS1 - 630 DS1 - 630 DS1 - 800
500 630 800
65 65 75
75 75 85
25 25 30
fixed fixed fixed
2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 240
1/2 1/2 1/2
44500 44630 44800
Type
Rated current Max. breaking In (A) capacity (kA) Icu
Operating breaking capacity ()Ics
Section of the power supply conductor (mm2)
Protection Packing/Box from overload (pcs)
Catalogue number
DS1 - 1250 DS1 - 1250
1000 1250
85 85
65 65
240 240
fixed fixed
1/1 1/1
44000 44502
33
CIRCUIT BREAKERS High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A electronic type (MCCB)
Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual - possibilities for electrical module parameters adjustment through direct modules (combination of keys) thus providing accurate protection from overload and short circuit - simultaneous protection of the three phases - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation - contactor for TT test 15V DC Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -2055
L 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 1 A B C D 3S 6S 12S 18S OFF 1.5 2 4 6 8 10 I TEST 15V dc l3 In=~630A o+ oXl1 t L
l1
xln
t1 t1 l=6l1 I1 I3
Protecting functions: Function L step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn with discreet coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1 Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C-12s; D-18s when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1 Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value OFF; 1.5; 2; 4; 6; 8; 10
Type Maximum breaking Operating Rated current Thermal current Section of the breaking capacity capacity () Icu In (A) adjustment (A) conductor (mm2) 400V 690V (kA) Ics Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
DS1 - 400 DS1 - 630 DS1 - 800 DS1 - 1250 DS1 - 1250 DS1 - 1600
400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
50 65 65 75 75 75
65 75 75 85 85 85
25 25 30 50 50 50
160 - 400 252 - 630 320 - 800 400 - 1000 500 - 1250 640 - 1600
240 2x185 2x240 2x240 2x240 2x240
1/3 1/2 1/2 1/1 1/1 1/1
44940 44963 44980 44999 44925 44960
fig. 1
34
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)
According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups: - internal devices accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers and fix them in specially designed jacks - external devices they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker INTERNAL DEVICES Auxiliary contact (OF) The device changes its condition conformably to the breakers condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor. Technical data: - for breakers up to 160A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 3A - for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 6A - available joining conductors - labeling of the cables Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Connecting: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
DS1 125/40+OF DS1 125/50+OF DS1 125/63+OF DS1 125/80+OF DS1 125/100+OF DS1 125/125+OF
Type of the breaker Catalogue number
44301 44302 44303 44304 44305 44306
Type of the breaker
Catalogue number
Type of the breaker
Catalogue number
DS1 160/160+OF DS1 250/200+OF DS1 250/250+OF DS1 400/400+OF DS1 630/500+OF DS1 630/630+OF
44307 44308 44309 44310 44311 44312
DS1 800/800+OF DS1 1600/1000+OF DS1 1600/1250+OF DS1 1600/1600+OF
44313 44314 44451 44316
Shunt release (MX) The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the breaker to which it is mounted Technical data: - rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz - electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A - electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A - available joining conductors Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Connecting: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number
DS1 125/40+MX DS1 125/40+MX DS1 125/40+MX+OF DS1 125/40+MX+OF DS1 125/50+MX DS1 125/50+MX DS1 125/50+MX+OF DS1 125/50+MX+OF DS1 125/63+MX DS1 125/63+MX DS1 125/63+MX+OF DS1 125/63+MX+OF DS1 125/80+MX DS1 125/80+MX DS1 125/80+MX+OF DS1 125/80+MX+OF DS1 125/100+MX DS1 125/100+MX DS1 125/100+MX+OF DS1 125/100+MX+OF DS1 125/125+MX DS1 125/125+MX DS1 125/125+MX+OF DS1 125/125+MX+OF DS1 160/100+MX DS1 160/100+MX DS1 160/100+MX+OF DS1 160/100+MX+OF
400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230
44317 44318 44319 44320 44321 44322 44323 44324 44326 44327 44328 44330 44331 44332 44334 44335 44336 44337 44338 44339 44340 44341 44342 44343 44463 44464 44465 44466
400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230
44333 44344 44345 44346 44347 44348 44349 44350 44351 44352 44353 44354 44467 44468 44469 44470 44355 44356 44357 44358 44359 44360 44361 44362 44363 44364 44365 44366
400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230
44367 44368 44369 44370 44371 44372 44373 44374 44375 44376 44377 44378 44379 44380 44381 44382 44451 44452 44453 44454 44455 44456 44457 44458 44459 44460 44461 44462
35
MN for DS1 - 125-160
Under voltage release (MN) The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain limits Technical data: - operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz - electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A - electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A - available joining conductors - switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the operating Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Connecting: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the breaker
Operating voltage (V)
Catalogue number
Type of the breaker
Catalogue number
MN for DS1 - 250-800
DS1 125/40+MN DS1 125/40+MN DS1 125/40+MN+OF DS1 125/40+MN+OF DS1 125/50+MN DS1 125/50+MN DS1 125/50+MN+OF DS1 125/50+MN+OF DS1 125/63+MN DS1 125/63+MN DS1 125/63+MN+OF DS1 125/63+MN+OF DS1 125/80+MN DS1 125/80+MN DS1 125/80+MN+OF DS1 125/80+MN+OF DS1 125/100+MN DS1 125/100+MN DS1 125/100+MN+OF DS1 125/100+MN+OF DS1 125/125+MN DS1 125/125+MN DS1 125/125+MN+OF DS1 125/125+MN+OF DS1 160/100+MN DS1 160/100+MN DS1 160/100+MN+OF DS1 160/100+MN+OF DS1 160/160+MN DS1 160/160+MN DS1 160/160+MN+OF DS1 160/160+MN+OF DS1 250/200+MN DS1 250/200+MN DS1 250/200+MN+OF DS1 250/200+MN+OF DS1 250/250+MN DS1 250/250+MN DS1 250/250+MN+OF DS1 250/250+MN+OF DS1 400/315+MN DS1 400/315+MN
400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230
44383 44384 44385 44386 44387 44388 44389 44390 44391 44392 44393 44394 44395 44396 44397 44398 44399 44402 44405 44406 44407 44408 44409 44410 44475 44476 44477 44478 44411 44412 44413 44414 44415 44416 44417 44418 44419 44420 44421 44422 44479 44480
DS1 400/315+MN+OF DS1 400/315+MN+OF DS1 400/400+MN DS1 400/400+MN DS1 400/400+MN+OF DS1 400/400+MN+OF DS1 630/500+MN DS1 630/500+MN DS1 630/500+MN+OF DS1 630/500+MN+OF DS1 630/630+MN DS1 630/630+MN DS1 630/630+MN+OF DS1 630/630+MN+OF DS1 800/800+MN DS1 800/800+MN DS1 800/800+MN+OF DS1 800/800+MN+OF DS1 1250/1000+MN DS1 1250/1000+MN DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF DS1 1250/1250+MN DS1 1250/1250+MN DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF DS1 1600/1600+MN DS1 1600/1600+MN DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF DS1 400/3300+MN DS1 400/3300+MN DS1 400/3300+MN+OF DS1 400/3300+MN+OF DS1 630/3300+MN DS1 630/3300+MN DS1 630/3300+MN+OF DS1 630/3300+MN+OF DS1 800/3300+MN DS1 800/3300+MN DS1 800/3300+MN+OF DS1 800/3300+MN+OF
400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230
44481 44482 44423 44424 44425 44426 44427 44428 44429 44430 44431 44432 44433 44434 44435 44436 44437 44438 44439 44440 44441 44442 44443 44444 44445 44446 44447 44448 44449 44450 44483 44484 44485 44486 44487 44488 44489 44490 44491 44492 44493 44494
36
EXTERNAL DEVICES Remote control (manual) Description: The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted - two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90C Mounting: The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base
Table with the dimensions for manual remote control Dimensions (mm) A B C Dmin Dmax Type of the breaker
HDC DS 1 125A HDC DS 1 160A HDC DS 1 250A HDC DS 1 400A HDC DS 1 630A HDC DS 1 800A
Type Type of the breaker
25 30 35 45 70 70 1 1 1 1 1 1
50 50 70 107 119 119
50 50 70 107 119 119
65 65 80 85 110 110 44967 44968 44969 44970 44971 44972
115 115 130 105 110 110
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
scheme 1
HDC HDC HDC HDC HDC HDC
DS1 125A DS1 160A DS1 250A DS1 400A DS1 630A DS1 800A
DS1 - 125-160
Device for remote control (electrical) Description: The device switches off/on the breaker to which it is mounted, at electrical signal it allows control from a great distance Technical data: - operating voltage of the executive mechanism: 230/400V 50/60Hz - two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90C - two types of executive mechanism: * magnetic operation for breakers DS1 up to 160A * motor operation for breakers DS1 from 250 to 800A Mounting: The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 and 2), and buttons on/off are fixed at the door of the distribution box and at the remote control device
Type Type of the breaker Operating voltage Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
DS1 - 250-1600
scheme 2
ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC
DS1 125 DS1 160 DS1 250 DS1 400 DS1 630 DS1 800 DS1 125 DS1 160 DS1 250 DS1 400 DS1 630 DS1 800 DS1 1600 DS1 1600
400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 400V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
44907 44908 44909 44910 44911 44911 44912 44913 44914 44915 44916 44916 44924 44926
scheme 3
Table with the dimensions for remote control Type of the breaker A A1 Dimensions (mm) B B1 H
DC DS 1 125 ADC DS 1 160 ADC DS 1 250 ADC DS 1 400 ADC DS 1 630 ADC DS 1 800
103.5 103.5 139 226 226 226
110 110 -
30 35 132 132 132 132
90 90 -
92 92 105 132 132 132
37
CIRCUIT BREAKERS High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; IEC 947-2
The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low voltage electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit protection, built in under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load monitoring. Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - motor control - mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under voltage release, earth protection, intelligent controlling block with a possibility for a choice of the protected function Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail * Connecting: - copper rails - busway connection at the back * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 500 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 9000 * IP code: IP54 * Mounting: - clamping with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Basic protective functions: * Overload protection with long time delay * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time inversion limit * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time fixed limit * Instantaneous short circuit protection * Earth protection function * Full stability function * Overload alarm function * Test function * Auto diagnostics function A commutation type of breakers with RS 485 connection for duplex transmission of all function parameters, adjustment and data can also be produced at clients order and delivery terms agreement.
Type
Outside dimensions A H W B L L1 H1 H2 H3 W1/W2 L5 L6 L7 W3-W5
DW1 2000A DW1 3200A
340 352
402 432
362 435
150 175
373 507
290 448
52 92
112 112
20 30
95 115
17 17
40 40
82 82
60 100
12 12
38
CIRCUIT BREAKERS High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series
Connecting scheme
Main circuit
Intelligent controller
Emergency breaking
Electrical breaking
Electrical closing
Auxiliary switches
J21
Closed
SB2 SB1 SB3
3 5
Fault
Accumulated energy
Break
25
27
29
31 33 35
36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 XT
Q 0 0
Main loop power supply
M SA DF
Control power supply
3(or4)
6(or8)
Process unit
(+)
(-) 1 2
26
28
30
32
34
37
40
43
46
Operating power supply
AC380V/220V
DC power supply module
U1(+) U2(-) DC220V 110V
Type
Rated voltage Un (V)
Breaking capacity ()
Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles)
Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
DW1 - 2000 DW1 - 3200 DW1 - 3200
2000 2500 3200
690 690 690
80 100 100
500 500 500
9500 9500 9500
1/1 1/1 1/1
44209 44255 44329
39
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1
The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power supply and two electrical sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set parameters. The system for dual power change-over switch consists of two high capacity circuit breakers mounted on a metal frame connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command device that controls the system parameters correspondence. Functions: * Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at main power supply discrepancy * Switching to dual power change-over at power supply phase lack * Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers * Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations supplied with a generator or a second power supply source (hospitals, post offices, military sites, control rooms) * Remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics * Control: motor * Controls the following circuit parameters: - presence of the three phases - the phase voltage to be in the set limits - overload - short circuit at the outlet Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6000V * Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail * Connecting: - copper rails - flexible or rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 60000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 10000 * IP code: IP21 * Mounting: - clamping with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Basic functions of the control device: * Overload protection * Instantaneous short circuit protection * Under phase protection * Undervoltage protection * Possibility for setting the change-over time between the two sources min 3s * Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main power supply source after restoring its parameters The system for dual power change-over switch is offered in two types: - with display (control device) mounted on the mounting plate (integrated type) - with separated control display
40
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)
Dimensions for ABP EQ1
Type of the breaker
Type
Overall dimensions (mm) A B C D H
EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630 EQ1 - 100* EQ1 - 225* EQ1 - 400* EQ1 - 630*
inner type inner type inner type inner type moved type moved type moved type moved type
480 480 620 660 420 420 570 610
240 240 300 300 230 230 300 300
450 450 590 630 390 390 540 580
210 210 270 270 200 200 270 270
140 140 235 240 145 145 235 240
Type
Max. breaking capacity Operating breaking (kA) Icu capacity ()Ics
Electrical wear Section of the power supresistance (number of Packing/Box (pcs) ply conductor (mm2) cycles)
Catalogue number
EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630 EQ1 - 100* EQ1 - 225* EQ1 - 400* EQ1 - 630*
100 225 400 630 100 225 400 630
22 35 42 50 22 35 42 50
15 25 35 42 15 25 35 42
35 70 180 240 35 70 180 240
6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1
44100 44225 44403 44633 44101 44226 44404 44634
Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display
41
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES Residual current devices JEL 2, JEL 1 / JEL 1A
COVER TERMINALS NON-FLAMABLE BASE CONTACT TEST BUTTON SECONDARY WINDING OF TT PRIMARY WINDING SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER (TT) WITH TOROID ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY BREAKING (RELEASE) UNIT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 2 2
4 8 7 9 6 10 5
44
Type AC for AC current
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 61008-1 EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1

N N
1 T
5 T
35
70
72 50
The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. The device breaks when the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz * Rated current: according to the table * Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n * Surge voltage wear resistance: 2000V * Short circuit current wear resistance: 4500, 6000 * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A * Type of the plastic: - material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66 - permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position * Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Connecting: - power supply busbar (only for bipolar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid with separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The corpus of the consumer depending on the grid type must be connected either to the protective conductor or be earthed. (Fig.1)
35
81
Fig. 1
45
Connecting scheme
consumer
R S T
JL1 2P JL1 4P consumer
PE
45
Residual current protection type A - JEL 1A. These are Residual Current Devices (RCDs) JEL 1A with enhanced sensibility and fast - operating protection devices applicable in circuits with harmonic or direct pulsating current component presence. Functions: * switching off electrical circuits on load at conductor insulation breaking to the consumer * switching off electrical circuits on load at direct and indirect contact * switching off electrical circuits on load at alternating earth fault currents during consequent light impact * switching off consumers at harmonic presence due to luminescent lights * switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault currents presence * mechanical indicator for ON position Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50 Hz * Rated current: according to the table * Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n * Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000 * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * IP code: IP>20 Connecting: - power supply busbar (only for bipolar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical
Type A for AC/DC current Documents corresponding to the product: EN 61008-1 EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1
Residual current devices JEL2, 4,5kA - Type AC - alternating fault current. Impulse withstand voltage 2000VAC
Type Number of poles Breaking capacity (kA) Rated current Packing/Box (pcs) In (A) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0
1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60
40710 40716 40792 40721 40731 40741 40761
40712 40717 40793 40722 40732 40742 40762
40713 40718 40794 40723 40733 40743 40763
40714 40719 40795 40724 40734 40744 40764
Type
Number of poles
Breaking capacity (kA)
Rated current Packing/Box (pcs) In (A)
Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2 JEL 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0
1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30
40810 40816 40892 40821 40831 40841 40861
40812 40817 40893 40822 40832 40842 40862
40813 40818 40894 40823 40833 40843 40863
40814 40819 40895 40824 40834 40844 40864
46

Residual current devices JL 1, 6kA - Type - alternating fault currents sensible. Impulse withstand voltage 2000VAC
Number of poles Breaking capacity (kA) Rated current Packing/Box (pcs) In (A) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
Type
JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Number of poles
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0 80.0 100.0
1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60
40210 40216 40292 40221 40231 40241 40261 40281 40291
40212 40217 40293 40222 40232 40242 40262 40282 40296
40213 40218 40294 40223 40233 40243 40263 40283 40297
40214 40219 40295 40224 40234 40244 40264 40284 40298
Type
JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1 JEL 1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0 80.0 100.0
1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30
40410 40416 40492 40421 40431 40441 40461 40481 40491
40412 40417 40493 40422 40432 40442 40462 40482 40496
40413 40418 40494 40423 40433 40443 40463 40483 40497
40414 40419 40495 40424 40434 40444 40464 40484 40498
Residual current devices JL 1A, 6kA - Type - alternating and pulsating direct fault currents sensible Impulse withstand voltage 2000VAC/ 400VDC
Type Number of poles Breaking capacity (kA) Rated current Packing/Box (pcs) In (A) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0 80.0 100.0
1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60
40510 40516 40592 40521 40531 40541 40561 40581 40591
40512 40517 40593 40522 40532 40542 40562 40582 40596
40513 40518 40594 40523 40533 40543 40563 40583 40597
40514 40519 40595 40524 40534 40544 40564 40584 40598
Type
Number of poles
JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A JEL 1A
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0 80.0 100.0
1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30
40610 40616 40692 40621 40631 40641 40661 40681 40691
40612 40617 40693 40622 40632 40642 40662 40682 40696
40613 40618 40694 40623 40633 40643 40663 40683 40697
40614 40619 40695 40624 40634 40644 40664 40684 40698
47
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JL5 (RCD)
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 61 009-1; EN 61009-2;
Description of the operating system: It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device - at failure in the conductors insulation. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual magnetic field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. When the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker the device breaks and the residual current device switches off from the power supply grid. The device operates without any extra power supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is not influenced by voltage varying or decreasing. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at failure in the insulation after the breaker Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz * Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table * Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: - of the residual current device: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n - of the circuit breaker: <0.1s * Circuit breaker breaking curve: C * Surge voltage wear resistance:2000V * Breaking capacity: 10000 * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A * Type of the plastic: - material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66 - dielectrical strength: >18MV/m * Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid with separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).
Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 1P 10kA

Type Number of designation poles Sections of Breaking the mounting Rated current Packing / Box capacity conductors (A) (pcs) (kA) (mm2) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
JEL5 JEL5 JEL5 JEL5 JEL5
2 2 2 2 2
10 10 10 10 10
1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0
10 16 25 32 40
7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140
40010 40016 40025 40032 40040
40011 40017 40021 40031 40041
40013 40018 40023 40033 40043
40015 40019 40026 40035 40045
48
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 61 009-1; EN 61009-2;
H 50
Description of the operating system: It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines part of the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device - at failure in the conductors insulation. It compares the rate of the currents through the conductors in an electronic comparator. The residual current device operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is needed for the comparators energizing a semi-conductor element with constantly set leakage current rate. This rate is compared with the actual rate. When the margin of the comparison is neutral, the residual current device does not operate, but at failure in the protected circuit insulation when it exceeds the set margin it operates and switches off the protection. For the normal operation of the residual current device, the power supplying circuit voltage must be over 170V and there must be no time variation. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz * Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table * Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: - of the residual current device: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n - of the circuit breaker: <0.1s * Circuit breaker breaking curve: C * Surge voltage wear resistance:2000V * Breaking capacity: 4500A; 6000 * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):500 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):2000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position Connecting: - power supply busbar (for two- or three polar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have separate conductors for operational neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).
Type Overall dimensions (mm) L H h
35
45
JEL 3 JEL 4 3P 3P+N
18 35 88 115.5
72 72 95 95
80 80
Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 1P, 6

Type designation Number of poles Sections of Breaking the mounting capacity conductors (kA) (mm2) Rated current (A) Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
JEL 4 C10 JEL 4 C16 JEL 4 C20 JEL 4 C25 JEL 4 C32 JEL 4 C40
2 2 2 2 2 2
6 6 6 6 6 6
1.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 10.0 16.0
10 16 20 25 32 40
5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100
40211E 40215E 40225E 40240E 40265E 40274E
40207E 40245E 40229E 40204E 40260E 40270E
40208E 40235E 40230E 40246E 40236E 40273E
40209E 40237E 40238E 40268E 40269E 40275E
49
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device
Combined electronic residual current device 1P + N. Compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors.
Type designation Number of poles Breaking capacity (kA) Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2) Rated current (A) Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (mA) 30 100 300 500
JEL 6 C10 JEL 6 C16 JEL 6 C25 JEL 6 C40 JEL 6 C50
2 2 2 2 2
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0
10 16 25 40 50
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
40110 40116 40125 40140 40163
40111 40117 40121 40141 40161
40113 40118 40123 40133 40136
40114 40119 40126 40145 40165
Combined electronic residual current device 2P. Compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors or between two phases.
2 2 2 2 2
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0
10 16 25 40 50
6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120
40211 40215 40225 40240 40265
40207 40245 40229 40204 40260
40208 40235 40230 40246 40236
40209 40237 40238 40268 40269
Combined electronic residual current device 3P. Compares the leakage current between the phases.
3 3 3 3 3
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0
10 16 25 40 50
3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60
40310 40316 40325 40340 40363
40311 40317 40321 40341 40361
40313 40318 40323 40343 40336
40314 40319 40324 40344 40365
Combined electronic residual current device 3P+N. Compares the leakage current between the three phases and neutral conductors.
4 4 4 4 4
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0
10 16 25 40 50
2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40
40411 40415 40425 40440 40465
40407 40445 40420 40404 40401
40408 40439 40428 40447 40436
40409 40438 40429 40446 40469
50
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES Surge arresters SPD type
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN61 643-1 EN 61 643-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
The surge arrestor consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions. At normal conditions of the system, the surge arrestor has infinitely high resistance between the protected conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the grounded circuit. After reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrestor can endure high momentary overloading. Functions: - protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from overload - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: automatic switching off at exit failure and recovery after eliminating the danger Technical data: * Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz * Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge arrester terminals at rated discharge current running: according to the tables * Rated discharge current In the rated value of discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20s, which can be repeatedly led to the ground: according to the tables * Full discharge current Imax the peak value of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20s, which the surge arrester can bear once: according to the table * Constant operating current: up to 800A for 1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600A for 1P + N, 3P + N * Indication for damaged surge arrester * Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N Connecting: * flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: * on DIN-rail * mounting position: vertical * mounting in the distribution box on the front or right before the breaker according to the attached schemes * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m COLOUR CODE for all types 5 - yellow; white 10; green 20 and red 40
The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D (from high to low risk level). The company offers the following models of arresters: Model SPD Bxxxx for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the installation or in the main panel. Model SPD Cxxxx for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or before the breaker. Model SPD Dxxxx for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in combination with SPD Bxxxx/SPD Cxxxx
51
Type of the arrester
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-D5/1p SPD-C10/1p SPD-C20/1p SPD-B40/1p
5 10 20 40
10 20 40 60
275 275 275 275
1.2 1.2 1.8 2
17 / 170 17 / 170 17 / 170 17 / 170
64101 64102 64103 64104
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-D5/1pN SPD-C10/1pN SPD-C20/1pN SPD-B40/1pN
5 10 20 40
10 20 40 60
275 275 275 275
1.2 1.2 1.8 2
8 / 80 8 / 80 8 / 80 8 / 80
64201 64202 64203 64204
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-D5/3p SPD-C10/3p SPD-C20/3p SPD-B40/3p
5 10 20 40
10 20 40 60
400 400 400 400
1.2 1.2 1.8 2
5 / 50 5 / 50 5 / 50 5 / 50
64301 64302 64303 64304
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-D5/3pN SPD-C10/3pN SPD-C20/3pN SPD-B40/3pN
5 10 20 40
10 20 40 60
400 400 400 400
1.2 1.2 1.8 2
4 / 40 4 / 40 4 / 40 4 / 40
64401 64402 64403 64404
Up
TNC L1 L2 L3 N+PE
MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
MACHINE PANEL
THREE PHASE CONSUMER
3xC61N-C63
3xC61N-C40
3xC61N-C40
SPD-C10/3p C61N-C25 TNS L1 SPD-D5/1p L2 L3 N MONO PHASE CONSUMER PE 4xC61N-C40
SPD-B40/3p
SPD-C20/3p
SPD-C10/3pN
B C
D
2xC61N-C25 MONO PHASE CONSUMER
SPD-D5/1pN
52
THREE PHASE CONSUMER
SURGE ARRESTERS combined AC DC Specially designed surge arresters providing protection of solar and photo - voltaic systems; designed to protect system against overvoltages resulting from indirect light impact. They could be installed in earthed and non earthed systems. They break photo - voltaic generator electric circuit when voltage reaches or over passes limit threshold value, providing photo - voltaic protection against destroying. COLOUR CODE for all types 5 - yellow; white 10; green 20 and red 30
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-DC-D5/1p SPD-DC-C10/1p SPD-DC-C20/1p SPD-DC-B40/1p
5 10 20 30
10 20 40 60
275 AC/400 DC 275 AC/400 DC 275 AC/400 DC 275 AC/400 DC
1.2 1.5 1.8 2.2
17 / 170 17 / 170 17 / 170 17 / 170
64105 64106 64107 64108
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-DC-D5/1pN SPD-DC-C10/1pN SPD-DC-C20/1pN SPD-DC-B40/1pN
5 10 20 30
10 20 40 60
1.2 1.5 1.8 2.2
8 / 80 8 / 80 8 / 80 8 / 80
64205 64206 64207 64208
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-DC-D5/3p SPD-DC-C10/3p SPD-DC-C20/3p SPD-DC-B40/3p
5 10 20 30
10 20 40 60
1.2 1.5 1.8 2.2
5 / 50 5 / 50 5 / 50 5 / 50
64305 64306 64307 64308
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SPD-DC-D5/3pN SPD-DC-C10/3pN SPD-DC-C20/3pN SPD-DC-B40/3pN
5 10 20 30
10 20 40 60
1.2 1.5 1.8 2.2
4 / 40 4 / 40 4 / 40 4 / 40
64405 64406 64407 64408
53
CONTACTORS Low voltage contactors LT 1 D/K
BASE STATIC MAGNETIC CORE COIL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
REVERSE SPRING MOVABLE MAGNETIC CORE MOVABLE CONTACTS LID STATIC CONTACTS
AUXILIARY CONTACT SCREWS TERMINAL PROTECTION CAPS
4 11 10 8 9
56
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 9474-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also have 1NC operating contactor. Functions: - switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of control systems - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC * Coil material: pure copper type QA-1 * Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360 * Moveable part material: Bakelite * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type
Overall dimensions (mm) a b A B C
LT1-D 09~32 LT1 - K
LT-K 06~12 LT-D 09~12 LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32 LT-D 40~65 LT-D 80~95
34/35 34/35 34/35 40 40 40 40
45 50/60 50/60 48 48 100/110 100/110
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5
45 47 47 57 57 77 87
50 70 70 80 80 126 126
50 82 87 95 100 116 127
LT1-D 40~95
57

Rated capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 415V 440V 660V 690V Coil capacity (VA) closed open Rated current Section of the Tightening moin AC-3 440V power supply Coil voltage (V) ment (N.m) to up conductor
Type number
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT 1 - K 0610 1NO
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
60
6A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
23061E 23062E 23063E 23064E 23065E 23066E 23067E
Type number
Rated capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 415V 440V 660V 690V
Coil capacity (VA) closed open
Rated current Section of the Tightening moin AC-3 440V power supply Coil voltage (V) ment (N.m) to up conductor
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT 1 - K 0910 1NO
2.2
3.7
3.7
3.7
60
9A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
23091E 23092E 23093E 23094E 23095E 23096E 23097E
Type number
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT 1 - K 1210 1NO
60
12A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
23121E 23122E 23123E 23124E 23125E 23126E 23127E
Type number
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT1 - D0910 1NO
2.2
5.5
60
9A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
23091 23092 23093 23094 23095 23096 23097
Type number
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT1 - D0901 1NC
2.2
5.5
60
9A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
23273 23270 23271 23272 23277 23278 23279
58

Type number
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT1 - D1210 1NO
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
60
12A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
Packing/Box (pcs)
23121 23122 23123 23124 23125 23126 23127

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D1201 1NC
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
60
12A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
Packing/Box (pcs)
23274 23280 23281 23282 23283 23284 23285

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D1810 1NO
7.5
10
60
18A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
Packing/Box (pcs)
23181 23182 23183 23184 23185 23186 23187

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D1801 1NC
7.5
10
60
18A
1.7
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
Packing/Box (pcs)
23275 23286 23287 23288 23289 23290 23291

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D2510 1NO
5.5
11
11
11
15
7.5
90
25A
2.5
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
Packing/Box (pcs)
23251 23252 23253 23254 23255 23256 23257

Catalogue number
Type number
Rated current Section of the Tightening mopower supply Coil voltage (V) in AC-3 440V ment (N.m) to up conductor
LT1 - D2501 1NC
5.5
11
11
11
15
7.5
90
25A
2.5
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
23276 23292 23293 23294 23295 23296 23297
59

Type number
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT1 - D3210 1NO
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
7.5
90
32A
2.5
10
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
Packing/Box (pcs)
23321 23322 23323 23324 23325 23326 23327

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D4011 1NO+1NC
11
18.5
22
22
30
20
200
40A
16
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
Packing/Box (pcs)
23401 23402 23403 23404 23405 23406 23407

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D5011 1NO+1NC
15
22
25
25
33
20
200
50A
25
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
Packing/Box (pcs)
23501 23502 23503 23504 23505 23506 23507

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D6511 1NO+1NC
18.5
30
37
37
37
20
200
65A
25
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
Packing/Box (pcs)
23651 23652 23653 23654 23655 23656 23657

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D8011 1NO+1NC
22
37
45
45
45
20
200
80A
50
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15
Packing/Box (pcs)
23801 23802 23803 23804 23805 23806 23807

Catalogue number
Type number
LT1 - D9511 1NO+1NC
25
45
45
45
45
20
200
95A
50
230 400 12 24 36 48 110
1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15
23951 23952 23953 23954 23955 23956 23957
60
CONTACTORS Low voltage contactors LT 1 - F

The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers operating in normal working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working environment. They are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 115A to 800A. Functions: - frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of systems for consumers control - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 1000V; 50/60Hz * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type * Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360 * Movable part composition: bakelite * Rated voltage of the coil: 230 and 400V AC * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors - rail * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200 * Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W * Mounting: - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 10C * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
LT 1 F150 LT 1 F225 LT 1 F265 LT 1 F400 LT 1 F630 LT 1 F800

Type number 220V 230V 380V 400V Motor rated capacity (kW) 415V 440V 500V 660V 690V 1000V
163.5 168.5 201.5 213 309 309

closed
170 197 203 206 304 304

open
171 181 181 219 255 255
Overall dimensions (mm) L M
107 113.5 141 145 155 155
150 172 178 182 264 264
26 21 39 43 60 60
57.5 51.5 66.5 74 89 89
Q1
40 48 48 48 80 80
Catalogue number 23111 23112 23113 23114 23115 23116 23117 23151 23152 23153 23154 23155 23156 23157 23861 23862 23863 23864 23865 23866 23867 23261 23262 23263 23264 23265 23266 23267 23751 23752 23771 23772 23881 23882
Coil capacity (VA)
Rated current in AC-3 440V to up
Tightening moPacking/Box Coil voltage (V) ment (N.m) (pcs) 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 230 400 230 400 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1
LT1 - F115
30
55
59
59
59
80
60
45
550
115 A
18
LT1 - F150
40
75
80
80
90
100
65
45
550
150 A
25
LT1 - F225
63
110
110
110
129
129
100
55
805
225 A
35
LT1 - F265
75
132
140
140
160
160
147
10
700
265 A
35
LT1 - F400 LT1 - F630 LT1 - F800
110 200 250
200 335 450
220 375 450
250 400 450
257 400 450
280 450 475
185 450 450
18 25 15
1000 1500 1300
400 A 630 A 800 A
50 50 50
Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil change.
61
CONTACTORS Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC
The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with constant current coil for control. The power plugs of the contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and consumers operating in normal operating class AC-3 with frequently switching on/off the consumer and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 9A to 225A. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current consumers in direct current controlling schemes at controlling signal to the coil - making of systems for consumers control - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contacts - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: from 12V DC to 220V DC * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V DC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type Overall dimensions (mm) A B C a b
a
C
LP1-D 09~95
LP 1 D0910 LP 1 D1210 LP 1 D1810 LP 1 D2510 LP 1 D3210 LP 1 D4011 LP 1 D5011 LP 1 D6511 LP 1 D9511 LP 1 F115 LP 1 F150 LP 1 F225
47 47 47 57 57 77 77 77 87 163.5 163.5 168.5
76 76 76 86 86 129 129 129 129 170 170 197

Packing/ Box (pcs)
95 95 95 101 101 176 176 176 182 171 171 181
34/35 34/35 34/35 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 48
50/60 50/60 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 150 150 172
B
Auxiliary contact (pcs.)
Type
Rated current ()
Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V DC) 12 24 36 48 110 230
LP 1 D0910 LP 1 D1210 LP 1 D1810 LP 1 D2510 LP 1 D3210 LP 1 D4011 LP 1 D5011 LP 1 D6511 LP 1 D9511 LP 1 F115 LP 1 F150 LP 1 F225
9 12 18 25 32 40 50 65 95 115 150 225
1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO 1NO 1NO
2.20 3.00 4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 25.0 30.0 40.0 63.0
4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 110
4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 45.0 59.0 80.0 110
4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 45.0 59.0 80.0 110
5.50 7.50 10.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 33.0 37.0 45.0 80.0 100 129
1/40 1/40 1/40 1/30 1/30 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/4 1/4 1/2
23962 23963 23964 23925 23966 23967 23968 23969 23970 23911 23912 23913
23098 23128 23188 23258 23328 23408 23508 23658 23958 23118 23158 23228
23130 23131 23132 23133 23134 23135 23136 23137 23138 23914 23915 23916
23971 23972 23973 23974 23975 23976 23977 23978 23979 23917 23918 23919
23980 23981 23982 23983 23984 23985 23986 23987 23988 23989 23990 23994
23139 23140 23141 23142 23143 23144 23145 23146 23147 23148 23149 23201
62
CONTACTORS AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43
The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three phase capacitors used for power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the transitional process of the capacitors switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched on in the beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group). The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr. Functions: - switching on/off of capacitors for reactive power compensation - making of systems for compensation of the energy reactive component - lowering of the peak transitional currents at switching on/off of the capacitor - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contacts - secured part of the contactor against consumer contact - do not allow manual operation Technical data: * Operation class: AC 6 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):300000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600 * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type Overall dimensions (mm) A B C D
CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-115DPK CJ19-150DPK CJ19-170DPK
56 75 85 85 122 122 122

Rated capacity of the consumer (kVAr)
74 127 127 127 165 165 165
130 180 200 200 230 230 230
150 150 157 157 157 157 157
Type
Rated current ()
400/440V
690V
Coil voltage (V)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-115 DPK CJ19-150 DPK CJ19-170 DPK
32 32 40 40 65 65 95 95 115 150 170
8 8 12.5 12.5 25 25 30 30 35 40 50
12.5 12.5 15 15 30 30 36 36 40 50 60
230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 230 230
1/20 1/20 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/4 1/4 1/4
23932 23910 23900 23940 23961 23965 23909 23995 23991 23992 23993
63
CONTACTORS Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx
LT 4-Dxx series contactors are specially designed electromagnetic devices for commutation of three phase induction motor with reversing controlling scheme. They represent two alternating current contactors LT 4-Dxx series factory mechanically joined together. The mechanical joining also provides locking of the contactors against simultaneous switching on. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction motors with shortly joined rotor. The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A. Functions: - switching on of electrical motors in one direction of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at outside command - making of control systems - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable switching on or separation of power contacts - secured part of the contactors against consumer contact - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor - impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the two contactors from the group due to mechanical locking Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative (for contactors over 40A there is also additional 1NC contact) * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors Note: The contactors are offered without fabric cabling * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1 000 000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10 000 000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600 * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type Overall dimensions (mm) A B C
LT 4 - D1810 LT 4 - D2510 LT 4 - D3210 LT 4 - D4011 LT 4 - D6511 LT 4 - D9511
100 130 130 167 167 182
70 80 80 126 126 127
83 98 105 116 116 127
Type
Rated current ()
Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT 4 D1810 LT 4 D2510 LT 4 D3210 LT 4 D4011 LT 4 D6511 LT 4 D9511
18 25 32 40 65 95
4 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 25
7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45
7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45
7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45
10 15 18.5 30 37 45
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1/8 1/8 1/6
23301 23302 23303 23304 23305 23306
64
CONTACTORS Auxiliary contact blocks
Auxiliary contacts At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for mounting on the movable part of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series. Functions: - extending the number of the operative contactors up to 4 in different Combinations - switches on simultaneously with the other contact system of the contactor * Operation class: AC 3 * insulation voltage: 690V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Mounting: - on the movable cover of the contactor through pinching - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC
Type
Number of contacts
Catalogue number
LT01-DN02 LT01-DN11 LT01-DN20 LT01-DN22 LT01-DN40 LT01-DN04 LT01-KN11 LT01-KN22
2NC NO+NC 2NO 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC NO+NC 2NO+2NC
23002 23011 23020 23022 23040 23004 23001 23003
65
CONTACTORS Auxiliary contact blocks
Auxiliary contacts LT03-DN11 Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the movable part of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series LT1 D. Variants with two additional plug points NO and NC are offered. Functions: - expanding the number of the operational plug points - switching on simultaneously with the rest of the contact system of the contactor Technical characteristics: * Environment operational regime: 3 * Insulation voltage: 690V * Double connector: screw connector * Connection: - flexible conductors with or without cable end - solid conductors * Mounting method: - mounting position sideward to the contactor * Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (self-extinguishing material)
Type
Catalogue number
L03-DN11
23311
Time delay contact block LT02-Dxx LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most frequently in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form star/delta starters for electrical motor control, as it provides the necessary time for motor winding.
Type
Number of contacts
Time delay
Catalogue number
L02-DT0 L02-DT2 L02-DT4
NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC
0.1~3s 0.1~30s 10~180s
23901 23902 23903
66
CONTACTORS Module contactors K series
Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low power electrical consumers. They provide connection between the consumers in small overall dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails. Functions: - switching on of consumers - making of control systems - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable switching on or separation of power contacts Technical data: * Operation class: AC 7a * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61095 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC
Type
In
Coil voltage (V)
Contacts
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
K20 K20 K20 K40 K40
20A 20A 20A 40A 40A
230V 230V 230V 230V 230V
2NO NO+NC 2NC 2NO+2NC 4NO
1 / 17 / 170 1 / 17 / 170 1 / 17 / 170 1 / 5 / 50 1 / 5 / 50
23008 23007 23009 23422 23409
2NO
NO+NC
2NC
4NO
2NO+2NC
67
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION Complex compensating devices
Complex compensating devices The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably connected with its transformation. The development of semiconductor elements and the broader coming of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control, welding machines and electrical arc furnaces in industrial projects have a negative impact over the electrical power quality in the electro distributing systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to create electromagnetic field. The reactive component of current is taken from the electro distributing systems but it leads to additional losses in the power supply system and makes shorter the exploitation term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the sinusoid form of current and voltage and interferences with harmonic character. Compensating the reactive power means to fill up the system in such a way that the needed reactive power to be created from the compensating device instead of being taken from the electro transportation system. This leads to killing the voltage fall and cable losses and increasing the outlet power of the power transporters and cutting down the bills for overconsumption of reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply company. In practice compensating the reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters combined in compensating installations has the broadest spreading. There are several types of compensation according to their location: * individual compensation when to every single motor or consumer is mounted a compensating system. It is applied to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity. * installation compensation when the consumers from the whole section (workshop) are grouped and compensation is accomplished for the whole section. * overall compensation accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation. According to the type of the compensating devices compensation can be: * passive when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not react to changes in the size and nature of the harmonic components and also to the per cent increase of the reactive energy in time. * active broader spread. The system controls the form of the consumed current and generates different capacity depending on the load changes. When designing the electro distributing system of industrial projects the following tasks are taken into consideration: * defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components * defining the additional loading of the capacitor batteries from the harmonic components and calculating the filtering elements if needed The calculation of the compensating device capacity is done by reading the reactive energy of the system and the working time of the system. Compensating devices represent a device of one or several metal boxes with common rail system, automatic regulator for cos control RPSF-xx series, different number of capacitor batteries (according to the capacity of the device) with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series, protective elements, etc. The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and reactive energy with capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111 series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure overload from harmonic components up to 7% from the basic harmonics. They are used in systems with high harmonics foul up to 25%. The high harmonics composition is defined after measuring the influence rate of each separate harmonics compared to the first one. In Bulgaria mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V and are normally mounted right in the compensation systems. When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is taken to be foul and in this case except using capacitors, filters for leveling the harmonics are to be used as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of the corresponding voltage harmonics and differ for the different harmonics. They are calculated using complex mathematical programme which reads the foul rate, the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic component, etc.
70
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION Capacitor batteries and cos regulator

Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed three phase dry capacitors for compensation of reactive energy and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in which a metal polypropylene folio is mounted which does not require special impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are acquired through filling with a special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at failure (overload from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper cover where are the connections to the power supply. This is done by a specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element. The breaking of the inner couplings provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to capacitor element failure. There is a three phase capacitor in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the capacitors. The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and active compensation. Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 440V; 50Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute * Capacity: from 8 to 30 kVAr at 440V * Tolerance: 5% * Operating temperature: -40C - +55C * Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr * Built in discharging resistance * Admissible current overload: twice as much the peak current * Discharge time: <50V per minute * Altitude: 2000m Mounting: * With bolt M12 orM16 to a flat horizontal base
Type of the battery
Dimensions H / (mm)
Battery capacity (kVAr)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
HY 111A8 HY 111A12 HY 111A15 HY 111A20 HY 111A30 HY 111B12* HY 111B25*
230 / 80 230 / 85 230 / 85 240 / 115 280 / 115 230 / 85 280 / 115
440 440 440 440 440 690 690
8.0 12.5 15.0 20.0 30.0 12.5 25
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
49008 49012 49015 49020 49030 49031 49032
Note: *Suitable for wind generators
71
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor
Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor (cos regulator) The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCF-xx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage systems and control of switching on of capacitor batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There is possibility for adjustment of the system parameters and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high degree of data security, easy programming and secure control of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and setting the parameters of the power supply system as: capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters such as voltage, current and capacity, losses, protection against overload, overload indication or lack of voltage, etc. The change of parameters is performed through a combination of buttons on the front panel. There is light diode to indicate which parameter is being displayed on the screen and which outlets are in operation. The display is four digital. There is possibility for choice of the working conditions: manual or automatic. Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V * Operating frequency: 45 65Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute * Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr * Measurement accurateness: - voltage: 1.0% - current: 1.0% - capacity coefficient: 1.0% - reactive energy: 2.0% * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Humidity: 30 60% * Display: 4 digital * Responsiveness: 20mA * Outlet: 7A * Number of outlets: 12 and 16 * Altitude: up to 2500m Mounting: * n the front panel of the box through cutting an opening
Type
Number of steps
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
HY-RPCF12 HY-RPCF16
12 16
8 8
49120 49160
72
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION Metal boxes
Metal boards for making of systems for capacity factor correction Metal boards for capacitor batteries mounting made of specially processed sheet iron with protective surface. A fan is mounted to provide temperature conditions. There is possibility a breaker to be mounted on the door. The device is protected against indirect contact to the current leading elements. It is mounted directly on the walls or floor, as at mounting on a wall it is fixed with screws to the surface. It necessary to provide enough distance for cooling of the board. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 400V; 50Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV/m * Operating temperature: -5-+55C * Maximum overloading current: 1.3xIn * Surface: zinc passivation * Colour: RAL 7032 * Altitude: up to 2500m Mounting: * on vertical or horizontal surfaces Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439-1 EN 60439-2
Type
Dimensions (mm) L H W
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CXF550/356/225 CXF1140/450/450 CXF1730/600/600

Note: The boards are supplied with a cooling fan
550 1140 1730
356 450 600
225 450 600
1 1 1
49225 49450 49600
73
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Thermal relays
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
Thermal relays The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are devices designed for protection of induction motors from overload or overheat. They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit for motor control is passed through their NC contacts. The operation of these devices is based on the curving of bimetal plates mounted in the thermal relay caused by the current passing through them. When the current to the consumer gets higher due to failure, the thermal current gets higher which leads to additional curving of the bimetal plates and at getting above the limit value for the plate it pushes the breaking mechanism and breaks the operating circuit. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching off alternating current consumers at current overload - making of control systems for consumers - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: >690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer - to the contactor through the relay terminals - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Indication for protection activating * Possibility for choice of the protection restoring (through the blue button) * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame through a pin - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Note: To protect the consumer from short circuit, before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a suitably measured breaker or safety device should be mounted.
hour
2h 1h 40 mm 20 mm 10 mm
4 mm 2 mm 1 mm 40 s 20 s 10 s
Type
Dimensions (mm) a b c m x y v z
4s 2s 1s 0.8 s 0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
LT 2 - Kxx LT 2 - E13xx LT 2 - E23xx

x value (Ir)
81 86 86 115
50 55 55 76
0 10.7 9 9.5
98 108 109 124
47 47 47 54
92 92 92 109
44 44 44 70
17 17 17 30
LT 2 - E33xx
76
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Thermal relays

Motor capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 660V 690V
For contactor LT1-K06 type
Rated current Protection (A) adjustment range
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT2-K0301 LT2-K0302 LT2-K0303 LT2-K0304 LT2-K0305 LT2-K0306 LT2-K0307 LT2-K0308 LT2-K0310 LT2-K0312 LT2-K0314
0.37 0.75 1.10 1.10 2.20
0.37 0.75 1.50 2.20 2.20 4.00
0.37 0.55 1.10 1.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 7.50
0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.0
0.10 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.00 1.0 - 1.60 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 - 4.00 4.0 - 6.00 5.5 - 8.00 7.0 - 10.0
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
13401 13402 13403 13404 13405 13406 13407 13408 13410 13411 13412
For contactors from LT1-D09 to LT1-D25 type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT2-E1301 LT2-E1302 LT2-E1303 LT2-E1304 LT2-E1305 LT2-E1306 LT2-E1307 LT2-E1308 LT2-E1310 LT2-E1312 LT2-E1314 LT2-E1316 LT2-E1321 LT2-E1322 LT2-E1353
0.37 0.75 1.10 2.00 2.20 3.70 4.00 5.50 9.00
0.37 0.75 1.50 2.20 3.70 4.00 5.50 7.50 9.00 11.0
0.37 0.55 1.10 1.50 3.00 4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 18.5
0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.0 13.0 18.0 25.0 33.0
0.10 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.00 1.0 - 1.60 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 - 4.00 4.0 - 6.00 5.5 - 8.00 7.0 - 10.0 9.0 - 13.0 12.0 - 18.0 17.0 - 25.0 23.0 - 32.0
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
13001 13002 13003 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13010 13012 13014 13016 13021 13022 13053
For contactor LT1-D32 type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT2-E2353 LT2-E2355
11 15
11 15
18.5 22.0
32 36
23.0 - 32.0 28.0 - 36.0
1 / 100 1 / 100
13253 13255
For contactors from LT1-D40 to LT1-D95 type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT2-E3355 LT2-E3357 LT2-E3359 LT2-E3363 LT2-E3365
18.5 22 30 45 55
18.5 22 30 45 55
30 30 37 55 75
40 50 65 80 93
30.0 - 40.0 37.0 - 50.0 48.0 - 65.0 63.0 - 80.0 80.0 - 93.0
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
13355 13357 13359 13363 13365
77
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2/TM 3
Dimensions
Auxiliary contact
UVR
The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control and protection of induction motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker thermal elements, and the short circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements allow the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal protection. The overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient temperature changes. In combination with under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching off alternating current consumers at current overload - switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer at inlet short circuit - protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage (if there is under voltage release) - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - possibility for change/choice of the protection current (according to the operating current of the motor) - automatic compensation of the ambient temperature Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A according to the type in table 1 * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer - to the contactor through the relay terminals - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Indication for protection activating * Switching on of the breaker manually with button I and switching off with button O manually or automatically at failure or after activating of the protection * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Possibility for independent operation or as an element of an automation system * Mounting: - mounting to DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
78
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2/TM 3
Type number
Rated capacity of three-phase motor in AC-3 category 220V 230V 400V 410V 440V 500V 690V
Magnetic segment current (A)
Thermal protection adjustment range (A)
Thermal current Ithe TM2-E (A)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
TM2-E01 TM2-E02 TM2-E03 TM2-E04 TM2-E05 TM2-E06 TM2-E07 TM2-E08 TM2-E10 TM2-E14 TM2-E16 TM2-E20 TM2-E21 TM2-E22 TM2-E32 TM3-E40 TM3-E63 TM3-E80
0.06 0.09 0.18 0.37 0.55 1.10 1.50 2.20 4.00 5.50 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 22.0
0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.10 2.20 3.00 5.50 7.50 9.00 11.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 40.0
0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.50 2.20 4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 11.0 15.0 22.0 33.0 45.0
0.37 0.37 1.10 1.50 3.00 4.00 7.50 9.00 11.0 15.0 18.5 25.0 40.0 55.0
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.50 2.20 4.00 5.50 9.00 15.0 18.5 22.0 22.0 33.0 55.0 63.0
1.5 2.4 5.0 8.0 13.0 22.5 33.5 51.0 78.0 138 170 223 327 327 416 480 550 665.5
0.1 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.00 1 - 1.60 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 - 4.00 4 - 6.30 6 - 10.0 9 - 14.0 13 - 18.0 17 - 23.0 20 - 25.0 24 - 32.0 25 - 40.0 40 - 63.0 56 - 80.0
0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 9 13 17 21 23 24 32 50 64
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15
48001 48002 48003 48004 48005 48006 48007 48008 48010 48014 48016 48020 48021 48022 48032 48040 48063 48080
79
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2/TM 3
For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can be supplied with auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the technical characteristics of the breakers. Voltage release (VR) for TM 2 The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un. Functions: - switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall under 0.55 0.7 Un - does not allow switching on of the breaker when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un - prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage - protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Mounting: * laterally to a breaker * At the side of the breaker through special openings
Type Voltage (V) Catalogue number
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
2 U225 3 U385
230 400
48099 48098
Watertight box for TM 2-E Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to IP 65. Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of up to 32A * Mounting: - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 - mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts - the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60529
Type Catalogue number
8083
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11 It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted. * Mounting: - laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C 21 22 * Altitude: up to 2000m
13 14
2 E11
48912
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AN11 It is designed to switch on operational circuits or signalization. It is designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted. * Mounting: - laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx - more than 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
2 N11 3 N11
48911 48913
80
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Starters for direct start
The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx fabric cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture. At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at clients order the fabric mounted thermal protection in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current consumers - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * IP code: IP 44 * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
1/L1
1/L1 2/L2 3/L3
13
LT2-Exx
95
KM 1
L2/N
A1
A2
96
14
LT2-Exx
KM 1
KM 1=LT1- Dxx
81
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Starters for direct start
Type
Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category 220V 230V 380V 400V 415V 440V
Rated current (A)
Thermal relay Coil Packing/Box adjustment range voltage (V) (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT5 D093 LT5 D123 LT5 D185

140 88
150 142 161 PE13 135 185 2 x PE16 16 150
2.2 3.0 4.0
4.0 5.5 7.5
4.0 5.5 9.0
9 12 18
7 .. 10A 9 .. 13A 12 .. 18A
230 400 230 4.0 230 400
1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16
43091 43092 43121 43122 43181 43182
120
Note: Under request the thermal relay will be replaced

166 2 x PE13
2 x PE13 2 x 5.5
Type
Rated current (A)
Catalogue number
LT5 D255 LT5 D325
5.5 7.5
11 15
11 15
25 32
17 .. 25A 23 .. 32A
230 400 230 400
1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16
43251 43252 43321 43322
2 x 5.5
101
165 312 2 x PE29 4 x 7.7 105 181 195
PE13
Type
Rated current (A)
Catalogue number
LT5 D405 LT5 D655 LT5 D955
11.0 18.5 25.0
18.5 30.0 45.0
22 37 45
40 65 95
30 .. 40A 48 .. 65A 80 .. 93A
230 400 230 400 230 400
1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6
43401 43402 43651 43652 43951 43952
82
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Star/delta starter
The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme star/delta. They are a combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons start and stop fabric cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding giving possibility for setting the time for unwinding in star as the time for switching between star and delta is fixed to 0.5 seconds. The starters are offered on the market in two types: - closed type metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors - open type for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased separately according to the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at clients order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current three phase motors operating according to a scheme star - delta - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - indication of the operating condition through a valve indicator - possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for the open type) - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC * insulation voltage: >690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Protection degree:IP54 * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
95 96 1 K3 2 U1 4 V1 6 W1 2 4 6 3 5 K1 2 4 6 1 3 5 21 REMOTE 22 13 14 K2 13 14 13 14 55 56 21 22 K2 K2 67 68 K1 21 22
CONTROL
2 U1
K2
V1 W1
1 2
3 4
5 6
LT2-Exx
K1
U2
V2
W2
K2
U2
V2
W2
K3
Kx = LT3-Dxx
K1
K3
83
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Star/delta starter
Type designation (without a box)
Overall dimensions (mm) height width depth
L3-D25 L3-D32 L3-D40 L3-D65 L3-D95
135 135 150 150 150
170 170 285 285 310
160 160 190 190 190
Rated capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 415V 440V
Rated current (A)
Coil voltage (V AC)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
L3-D25 L3-D32 L3-D40 L3-D65 L3-D95
11 15 18.5 30 37
15 18.5 22 55 75
15 18.5 22 55 75
15 18.5 22 55 75
25 32 40 65 95
400 400 400 400 400
1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/4
43253 43323 43403 43653 43953
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.
Overall dimensions (mm) height width depth
LT 3 -B-D25A LT 3 -B-D32A LT 3 -B-D40A LT 3 -B-D65A LT 3 -B-D95A
370 370 470 470 470
240 240 265 265 265
160 160 160 160 160
Rated capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 415V 440V
Rated current (A)
Coil voltage (V AC)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LT 3 - B - D25 LT 3 - B - D32 LT 3 - B - D40 LT 3 - B - D65 LT 3 - B - D95
11 15 18.5 30 37
15 18.5 22 55 75
15 18.5 22 55 75
15 18.5 22 55 75
25 32 40 65 95
400 400 400 400 400
1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2
43254 43255 43256 43257 43258
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.
84
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Reverse starters
L -1
4A 95NC R 96 97NO F1 98
I
14 N0 K1 13 S1
0
14 N0 K2 13 S2
II
A2 K1 A1
A2 K2 A1
L 2/N
L1 L2 L3
The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and protection of induction motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons start and one stop fabric cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for pushing the button stop and giving command from the other start for changing the motor winding direction. The two contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start in both winding directions. The starters are offered closed type in metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54) as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. The starters are offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. Functions: - switching on alternating current three phase motors in one winding direction, switching off and change of the winding direction at giving a signal - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * IP code: IP 44 * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
K1
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2
K2
6 T3
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
F1
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
U1 V1 W1
Type designation (with a box)
scheme Reverse
Rated capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 415V 440V Overall dimensions (mm) height width depth Rated current (A) Coil voltage (V AC) Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
LT 4 - B - D25 LT 4 - B - D32 LT 4 - B - D40 LT 4 - B - D65 LT 4 - B - D95 LT 4 - B - D25 LT 4 - B - D32 LT 4 - B - D40 LT 4 - B - D65 LT 4 - B - D95
11.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 37.0 11.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 37.0
15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0
15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0
15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0
240 240 270 270 270 240 240 270 270 270
240 240 265 265 265 240 240 265 265 265
160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
25 32 40 65 95 25 32 40 65 95
400 400 400 400 400 230 230 230 230 230
1/8 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
43001 43002 43003 43004 43005 43006 43007 43008 43009 43010
85
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS ELM 1000 frequency inverters
Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and packaging machines, pumps, air conditioning systems, etc. The ELM 1000 inverter provides the so-called no-sensor control, V/f control and impulse control while the output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons. The inverter can auto calibrate according to the motor power, i.e. if the inverter is connected to a motor with power different from that set by the inverter manufacturer, it automatically adjusts its programmable parameters to suit the motor parameters. Functions: - rotation speed increase automatic and manual - sliding compensation: from 0 to 20% - no-sensor control of the motor - adjustment of the V/F control curve linear or quadratic - energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve - PID control law implementation option - omission of resonance frequencies - JOG function - counter function - automatic restart option in case of power supply failure - fifteen speed degrees control option - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage - auto-calibration in accordance with the switched motor - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc. - outgoing discrete control signal 24V - outgoing analogue control signal 0 10V - DC brake in static mode - dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor used in inert electric motor load - output voltage adjustment option - activation of output safety functions option - electronic motor protection Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: 10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Output frequency: 0 400 Hz * Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max * Overload capacity: - constant: up to 110% - momentary: up to 150% * Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1% * Type of connection: - the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB or MCCB type - connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power - connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2 Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and the motor, except as described in the product passport. * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts - mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5 Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10 to 60 C * Altitude : up to 2000 m * Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
86
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS ELM 1000 frequency inverters
Type of sign EL1000- G -0150 T3
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase motor power inverter type: G=constant momentum inverter model
Type Overall dimensions (mm) H W A B D d
EL1000-G0007S2B EL1000-G0015S2B ELM1000-G0022S2B EL1000-G0007T3B EL1000-G0015T3B EL1000-G0022T3B EL1000-G0037T3B EL1000-G0040T3B EL1000-G0055T3B EL1000-G0075T3B EL1000-G0110T3C EL1000-G0150T3C
150 170 170 170 170 170 250 250 300 300 340 380
105 125 125 125 125 125 162 162 200 200 225 230
139 160 160 160 160 160 233 233 282 282 322 362
94 114 114 114 114 114 145 145 182 182 160 186
120 140 140 140 140 140 150 150 160 160 220 225
4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6
Type
Input voltage (V)
Maximum output power (kW)
Maximum current output Packing/Box (pcs) ()
Catalogue number
EL1000-G0007S2B EL1000-G0015S2B ELM1000-G0022S2B EL1000-G0007T3B EL1000-G0015T3B EL1000-G0022T3B EL1000-G0037T3B EL1000-G0040T3B EL1000-G0055T3B EL1000-G0075T3B EL1000-G0110T3C EL1000-G0150T3C
230 230 230 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
0.75 1.5 2.2 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
4.5 7 9 2 4 6.5 8 9 12 17 23 32
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1
423107M 423115M 423122M 423307M 423315M 423322M 423337M 423340M 423355M 423375M 423391M 423392M
R S T
R S T
OP 1 OP 2 OP 3
U V W E
TA TB TC FM V3 IM V3 12V OUT A+ BM
OP 4 OP 5 OP 6 OP 7 OP 8
COM V1 V2
I2 V3
485 Comunication
87
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters
Stopping equipment Brake resistor and brake element used when stopping time is little or load inertia moment is huge. Inverters up to 15W are offered with built in brake element but for consumers with high requirements to stopping, there are brake resisters as an outer module for additional mounting to the brake module. Functions: - increasing of the brake moment - providing a quick stop of the motor Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: 10% * Disbalance of the phases: <3% * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections
Inverter type
Input voltage (V)
Breaking module
Break resistor admissible Packing/Box value for inverter type (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL xxx-G0007S2 EL xxx-G0015S2 EL xxx-G0022S2 EL xxx-G0007T4 EL xxx-G0015T4 EL xxx-G0022T4 EL xxx-G0037T4 EL xxx-G0040T4 EL xxx-G0055T4 EL xxx-G0075T4 EL xxx-G0110T4 EL xxx-G0150T4
230 230 230 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded
80W/200 160W/100 300W/70 80W/750 160W/400 300W/250 400W/150 400W/150 600W/100 800W/75 1000W/50 1500W40
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
422202 422204 422205 422206 422207 422208 422209 422210 422211 422212 422213 422214
Remote control (Extension of the control panel) It doubles the control panel and serves for control of the inverter from a distance. It represents the inverter panel fabric cabled with cables with different length 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 5 and 10m. It is ordered as a separate position in addition to the standard equipment of the inverter.
Inverter type Cable length Type designation Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
EL xxx-G0007S2 EL xxx-G0015S2 EL xxx-G0007T4 EL xxx-G0015T4 EL xxx-G0022T4 EL xxx-G0037T4 EL xxx-G0055T4 EL xxx-G0075T4 EL xxx-G0110T4 EL xxx-G0150T4
2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m
UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPG 2 UPG 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPG2 422UPG2
88
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS ELM 2500 soft starter
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-4-2 EN 60947-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. A number of motor control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of stardelta switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of starters as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode is set, a shunt contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft starter is not designed to control motors in a set mode. Under a stop command in accordance with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in shutting the motor down. Functions: 1. System functions - over-voltage protection motor will switch off when power supply exceeds the preset limits - overload protection protects the motor from overloading - phase loss protection - temperature overload protection 2. Control functions - output faults - motor faults diagnostics - keyboard or outward control - delayed start option - faults memory Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: 10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Obligatory bypass contactor installation * Mounting : - mounting to a flat surface through bolts - mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5 Note: When more than one soft starter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Altitude : up to 2000 m
Type
Overall dimensions (mm) A B C E F d
EL M25015 EL M25022 EL M25037 EL M25045 EL M25055
250 250 250 250 250 510
153 153 153 153 153 260
162 162 162 162 162 194
219 219 219 219 219 389
140 140 140 140 140 232
6 6 6 6 6 8
F B R ST L
EL M25075
A
Power of Rated cur- Type of bypass motor (kW) rent (A) contactor Section of power supply conductors Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
QF
S3 Lt2 S2 S1
Type
EL M25015 EL M25022 EL M25037 EL M25045 EL M25055 EL M25075
15 22 37 45 55 75
30 45 76 90 110 150
LT 1-D 50 LT 1-D 50 LT 1-D 80 LT 1-D 95 LT 1-F 115 LT 1-F 150
10 10 16 25 25 35
1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1
42225015 42225022 42225037 42225045 42225055 42225075
R LT1-D/Fxx
15 PE
14 RST
13 BX
12 STOP
11 10 RUN CM
LM2500
U V W 1 Y1 2 Y2 3 Y3 4 T1 5 6 7 30A 8 9 30B 30C T2 T3
LT 2 Exx
LT 1 D/Fxx
L1
89
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Programmable timers
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15A The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Operations: 8 switching ON/OFF * Time deviation: <2s (at 25C) * Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10C - +40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 6A - inductive load: up to 2.5 * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
15
1 / 100
50036
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15B The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting.It can memorize up to six ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. There is possibility for automatic correction of the time according to the seasonal sun variations. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer) * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF * Time deviation: <2s (at 25C) * Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 6A - inductive load: up to 2.5 * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
15 B
1 / 100
50101
92
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
TE 20
1 / 92
50100
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 20 The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust forty-eight ON/OFF cycles. Each program setting is done through selection of the cycle start and end time with the push buttons. When a program is on, the time cycle is indicated as a dimmed out section on the dial. For example, if you start a 2-hour program the 2-hour portion between On and Off times on the dial becomes dark. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 15 minutes. The battery allows programme storing at lack of power supply. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Time deviation: <2s (at 25C) * Battery for programme storing and operation: up to 150 hours * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 16A * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail Tariff switching clock (timer) TE 18 The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used for switching on tariff lighting in housing buildings and switching off after the adjusted time. Easy to adjust time intervals, mounting and conducting. Reliable to use. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Adjustment range: 0.5 to 20 min * Power consumption: <5VA * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 16A - inductive load: up to 10 A * Weight: 75g Mounting: * DIN-rail Time relay star/delta TE 19 The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at star/delta starters and it is used for setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done through selection of the time unit (seconds or minutes) and rate (x 0.1 or x1) by the slide switches, and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from 0 to 10). Whenever timer circuit receives a signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is available. It gives possibility for time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the consumers need. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600 seconds * Repetition accuracy: 5% from the whole scale * Adjustment accuracy: 5% from the whole scale * Zeroing time: <0.5s * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 5A * Indication: - at operation in star: red indication - at operation in delta: green indication * Weight: 150g Mounting: * DIN-rail
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
TE 18
1 / 200
35005
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
TE19
1 / 200
50102
93
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
8 - 1 8 - 2
1 / 75 1 / 75
50113 50114
Timer TE8A 1a, TE8A 2a The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Timer programming is done through selection of the operational day(s) of the week, followed by selection of the start time and end time. You may choose out of ten modes (one for each day of the week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one for the whole week). When setting the time, you should start first with the hours and then continue with the minutes. 8A - 1a - Up to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute. 8A - 2a - It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10C - +55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 16A * Two outlet relays * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Weight: 150g Mounting: * DIN-rail
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
Impulse relay Impulse relays allow circuit remote control. They can be operated manually, remotely, from several control points, or by impulses. Impulse relays are most frequently used for the control of lighting circuits in various public places with multiple control points. Technical data: * Control voltage: 230V * Rated current of the power circuit: 16 * Electrical endurance: 200000 cycles * Maximum switching frequency: 5 operations/minute * Impulse duration: 50ms Connection: * tunnel terminals
EP510
8 / 160
50300
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
TE6B
1 / 100
50104
Timer TE6B The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99 hours 59 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Possibility for choice of operating range: - from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds - from 1 second to 99.59 minutes - from 1 minute to 99.59 hours * Error: <0.01% 0.05s * Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity at active load: 3A * Weight: 300g Mounting: * on the front panel of the board
94
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
TE48S-S
84
50105
Timer TE48S-S The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for correction of the set values during operation. First, select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the time. Depending on the timer coupling, it can be used as a cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time set, then counts the second time set, then starts counting over the first time again, etc. until a stop signal is received. In another mode, the timer can count the set time and stop until a new signal is received to count the next cycle. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U * Possibility for choice of operating range: - from 1 to 99 seconds - from 1 minute to 99 minutes * Error: <0.01% 0.05s * Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity at load: 3A * Weight: 300g Mounting: * on the front panel of the board
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
19M
1 / 200
50102M
Timer 19M Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting on DIN rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of the keys. There is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or hours depending on the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A. Technical characteristics: * Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours * Accuracy of setting: 5% from the whole scale * Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds * Consumed capacity: < 5VA * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 000 cycles * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 cycles * Operation temperature: -10 - +55 * Humidity: 45 - 85%RH * Computing option: up to 5 * Indication: - on power supply: red indication - on operational output relay: green indication * Weight: 150 gr. * Time functions: according to the programming guide Mounting method: * DIN rail
95
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Digital counters
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Type Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
CE2J
1 / 45
50111
Universal digital counter CE2J The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and high counting reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with black lighting digits, providing excellent visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Counting range: 0 - 99999 * Counting speed: 30/3k cps * Zeroing: outside impulse * Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years * Power consumption: <5VA * Operating temperature: -10-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A * Weight: 250g Mounting: * on the front panel * opening with dimensions: 45x45

CE10J
1 / 45
50120
Combined digital counter/timer CE10J The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Counting range: 0 999 * Timer range: 0.01 99h99min * Counting speed: 30/500 cps * Zeroing: outside impulse * Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years * Power consumption: <3VA * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A * Weight: 120g Mounting: * on the front panel * opening with dimensions: 45x45
96
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Digital counters
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 61010-1

Total digital counter CE15J The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: built in battery * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC * Counting accuracy: <0.002% * Data storing battery: up to 5 years * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail
CE15J
1 / 100
50112

Total digital counter CE15L The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for time impulse sequence counting with accumulation. It displays the operated time. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: built in battery * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC * Counting accuracy: <0.002% * Battery for data storing: up to 5 years * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail
CE15L
1 / 100
50115

EK - RSTB
1 / 200
50103
Phase sequence indicator EK - RSTB The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and quality of the phases. The device indicates the following fault: - lack of one or several phases; - change in the sequence of the phases; - lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%; - increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%; - phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: 10% In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit. The time between fault indication and outlet relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very short breaks. When the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 400V; 50Hz * Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 10 seconds * Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to 480 V * Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles * Indication: - green LED indication for a change in the condition - red LED - failure * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail
97
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Industrial Relays
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 60947-5-1; EN 61810
Industrial Relays and Bases Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control of industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar. Technical Characteristics: * Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V , 50 z and from 12 to 110V DC * Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110% Un * Rated current of the sockets: 10 * Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles * Isolation resistance: 500 m /min (500V) * Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50z * Dielectric strength: 1000V /1 min * Turn-out time: 25ms * Working temperature: -5 - + 65 * Humidity: 35 - 85% RH Method of installation: * on a DIN rail by means of a socket
Relay type Voltage of the coil (V) Socket type Resistance of the coil ( ) Number of contacts Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
ELM - 14FC ELM - 14FC ELM - 14FC

Relay type
12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC

Voltage of the coil (V)
ELM-08A ELM-08A ELM-08A

Socket type
270 1080 4340

Resistance of the coil ( )
NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC

Number of contacts
100 / 1000 100 / 1000 100 / 1000

Packing/Box (pcs)
57141 57142 57143

Catalogue number
ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13
Relay type
12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 230 VAC 12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 110 VAC 230 VAC
Voltage of the coil (V)
Socket type
20 80 320 7400 20 80 320 1700 7400

Resistance of the coil ( )
2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC

Number of contacts
20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300

Packing/Box (pcs)
57601 57602 57603 57605 57611 57612 57613 57614 57615

Catalogue number
Socket type
12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 230 VAC 12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 110 VAC 230 VAC
Dimensions (mm)
Number of terminals (pcs.)
42 168 675 14000 42 168 675 3500 14000
2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC
50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500 50 / 500
57521 57522 57523 57525 57541 57542 57543 57544 57545
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ELM - 08A ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.23
72 x 15 67 x 30 67 x 30 68 x 38 68 x 38
5 11 14 8 11
20 / 600 10 / 240 10 / 240 10 / 400 10 / 400
57901 57902 57903 57904 57905
98
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Industrial Relays

Industrial Solid State Relays (SSR) Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch devices with reliable ON/OFF performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The non-contact electronic switch is optically separated from the input signal by a photoelectric coupler. This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of the devices small overall size. Another important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending on the input signal value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can work at comparatively high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. RRS have transparent plastic covers to additionally improve their safety level. The SSR use is connected with considerable heat emissions, so measures must be taken to dispense the excessive thermal energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through application of specially deigned radiators. The correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is made by calculating the heat generation capacity with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A. The heat removal surface is estimated with the help of the following graphic: Technical Specifications: Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz orheSRndrom0 o230/400VDC or the solid state voltage regulators Rated output current: from 10 to 60 Insulating voltage: 1000 M /min (500V) Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min Leakage current: <2mA Turn-on time: <10ms Operating temperature: -5 + 65 Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
Type Relay Type Control Voltage Output Voltage Number of Output Current Packing/Box (V) (V) phases () (pcs) Catalogue number
Documents corresponding to the product: EN 60947-5-1; EN 61810
ZG3NC - 2 - 10B ZG3NC - 2 - 20B ZG3NC - 2 - 25B ZG3NC - 2 - 40B ZG3NC - 2 - 60B ZG3NC - 3 -10B ZG3NC - 3 - 20B ZG3NC - 3 - 25B ZG3NC - 3 - 40B ZG3NC - 3 - 60B
Type
SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR
Relay Type
3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC
230VC 230VC 230VC 230VC 230VC 400VC 400VC 400VC 400VC 400VC
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
10 20 25 40 60 10 20 25 40 60
10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100
57710 57720 57725 57740 57760 57713 57723 57735 57743 57763
Catalogue number
Control Voltage Output Voltage Number of Output Current Packing/Box (V) (V) phases () (pcs)
ZG1NC - 2 - 10D ZG1NC - 2 - 20D ZG1NC - 2 - 25D ZG1NC - 2 - 40D ZG1NC - 3 -10D ZG1NC - 3 - 20D ZG1NC - 3 - 25D ZG1NC - 3 - 40D
Type
SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator
Relay Type
1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC
0-230VC 0-230VC 0-230VC 0-230VC 0-400VC 0-400VC 0-400VC 0-400VC
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
10 20 25 40 10 20 25 40
10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100 10 / 100
57810 57820 57825 57840 57813 57823 57835 57843

Catalogue number
Control Voltage Output Voltage Number of Output Current Packing/Box (V) (V) phases () (pcs)
ZG33 - 3 - 10 ZG33 - 3 - 20 ZG33 - 3 - 25 ZG 33 - 3 - 40
SSR SSR SSR SSR
3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC
400VC 400VC 400VC 400VC
3 3 3 3
10 20 25 40
1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30
57831 57832 57833 57834
Note: The relay output must be supplied with a varistor to ensure its over-voltage protection, whenever RRS is used to control inductive loads.
Type of Radiator Overall Dimensions (L/W/H) Approximate Load Packing/Box (A) (pcs) Catalogue number
QW-A 50 QW-B 72 QW-B 100 QW-C 115 QW-E 50
60 x 50 x 50 72x100x50 100x100x50 115x100x50 150x88x35
15 20 25 40 75
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 40
57906 57907 57908 57909 57910
99
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Current measurement transformers
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1; EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6
Current measurement transformers MES - xx/xx type The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is the inlet range of the transformer. Technical data: * Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz * Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 x In * Inlet current: 50 1200A * Outlet current: 5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+65C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Precision class: 0.5 Mounting: *Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted; * vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails according to the opening of the transformer * Current transformers can be mounted on flat surfaces by use of fixing clamps.
Type
Overall dimensions (mm) D E
MES - 75/30 MES - 75/40 MES - 86/60

Type
88 88 117
Range
52 52 57
52 52 57
Precision class
41 41 184
Capacity VA
77 77 77
Weight kg
31 41 61
31 41 61
Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
MES - 75/30 MES - 75/30 MES - 75/30 MES - 75/30

Type
50/5 75/5 100/5 150/5

Range
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Precision class
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5

Capacity VA
0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

Weight kg
1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40
Packing/Box (pcs)
45050 45075 45103 45153

Catalogue number
MES - 75/40 MES - 75/40 MES - 75/40 MES - 75/40 MES - 75/40 MES - 75/40
Type
200/5 250/5 300/5 400/5 500/5 600/5

Range
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Precision class
5 5 10 10 10 15
Capacity VA
0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

Weight kg
1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40
Packing/Box (pcs)
45204 45254 45304 45404 45504 45604

Catalogue number
MES - 86/60 MES - 86/60 MES - 86/60 MES - 86/60 MES - 86/60 MES - 86/60
400/5 500/5 600/5 800/5 1000/5 1200/5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
15 15 15 15 15 15
0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 40 1 / 32 1 / 32
45406 45506 45606 45806 45906 45916
100
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Current measurement transformers
Current transformers, type Current measuring transformers of duct type. Specially designed to be installed in measuring circuits without removing cables in current measuring circuit. CP Transformers save installation time and decrease installation costs Technical Specification: - small size table: - secondary coil rated current 5 - rated voltage 720V - frequency 50Hz - rated load: up to 30VA - safety coefficient: fs5 - accuracy class :0.5; 1 - secondary coil connection: cable shoe terminal
G
C
Type
Overall dimensions (mm) D E
23 58 88
Type
20 50 80
Range
30 80 80
51 78 108
Precision class
89 114 144
Capacity VA
111 145 145

Weight kg
34 32 32
47 32 32
23 23 23
200/5 250/5 300/5
1 1 0,5
1.5 1,5 1,5
0,74 0,74 0,74
1 / 45 1 / 45 1 / 45
452320 452325 452330
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
58 58 58 58 58
250/5 300/5 400/5 500/5 600/5
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5
1,5 1,5 1,5 2,5 2,5
0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87
1 / 36 1 / 36 1 / 36 1 / 36 1 / 36
455825 455830 455840 455850 455860
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
88 88 88 88 88 88
400/5 500/5 600/5 750/5 800/5 1000/5
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5
1,5 1,5 1,5 2,5 2,5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
458840 458850 458860 458875 458880 458890
101
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Devices for temperature measurement

Type
CD - 701
50124
Digital Temperature Controller Type CD - 701 The device is intended for industrial control and monitoring of temperature. It allows monitoring and adjustment of temperatures of up to 1999 depending on the used sensor thermocouple or thermoresistor. The device allowsprogramming of the used type of sensor ( (CA) ; J ( IC) PT 100, etc.) and the controller working range. It also allows selection of the control algorithm, error adjustment, indication hysteresis curve adjustment and alarm settings. The controller is intended for mounting on control panels. It is user friendly and can be set through the push buttons on the device front panel. The program can be password protected. When operational, the display shows the set temperature and the current temperature. Technical Specifications: * Rated voltage: 230V, 50 Hz Permissible voltage deviation: 85 - 110% Un Input signal: from thermocouple, thermoresistor or unified signal (4-20mA; 0-10VDC) Output: Relay Emergency Output: Relay Electrical life: 1 000 000 cycles. Indication: - Green LED indicates the measured (current) temperature - Red LED indicates the set temperature Insulation resistance: 20 M /min (500V) Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz Operating temperature: -5 + 65 Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH Mounting: * on the front panel
Thermocouple and thermo resistance The thermo-measuring elements are designed for measuring the temperature in the point of contact between the surface (warmed or cooled) and the thermo-element. They are a comparatively cheap and the most wide-spread method for temperature measurement. The thermocouples are produced by accumulating two conductors from a special measuring alloy in one common head. Each of these elements has a specific electromotive voltage at a specific temperature. The temperature measuring is based on the difference in the electromotive powers between the hot and the cool end of the thermocouple, while this difference in the form of voltage of several milivolts is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermocouple is produced and calibrated for measuring of specific temperature ranges depending on the alloys of which it is made. When thermocouples measuring great distances from the thermoregulators are used (more than 15 points), it is obligatory to use compensatory cable corresponding to the type of the thermocouple. The thermo-resistant elements action is based on the capacity of specific alloys, very often Pt100 to change their resistance when the temperature is changed. For each temperature value is specified a value of resistance. This value is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermoregulator operates with a specific type of thermo-element.
Type of thermoelement
Symbol
Temperature range
Type of catching
Sizes of the Size of the free Packing/Box head end (pcs)
Catalogue number
K K K K J J Pt100 Cu50
WRNT - 01 WRNT - 01 WRNT - 31 WRNT - 13 WRKT - 01 WRKT - 13 WZPT - 03 WZCT - 03
-15 95C 0 400C 0 400C 0 400C 0 400C 0 400C -100 250C -50 100C
nut nut Bayonet explosion-proof nut explosion-proof explosion-proof explosion-proof
30 x 35 30 x 35 30 x 35 6 30 x 35 6 6 6
1m 1m 0.5m 2m 1m 2m 2m 2m
1 / 300 1 / 300 1 / 200 1 / 200 1 / 300 1 / 300 100 50
50K95G 50K40G 50K40B 50K40EX 50J40G 50J40EX 50PT95EX 50PT40EX
102
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Displaying measurement devices
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EKDP-15AA EKDP-15AD EKDP-15VA EKDP-15VD
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
50117A 50117D 50116A 50116D
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter EKDP 15 A/V Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types: -amperemeter -voltmeter It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current (AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz * Inlet signal: - operating as voltmeter: 2 700V (the range is adjusted from inside) - operating as amperemeter: 5 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside) Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used * Consumption: <5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+50C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale * Display: LCD * Weight: 150gr Mounting: * DIN-rail
Type
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EKDP7-AV EKDP7-AA EKDP7-DV EKDP7-DA EKDP7-HZ
1 / 84 1 / 84 1 / 84 1 / 84 1 / 84
50106 50107 50108 50109 50110
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter and frequency meter EKDP7 Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types: - amperemeter: EKDP7 AA amperemeter for alternating current EKDP7 DA amperemeter for direct current - voltmeter: EKDP7 AV voltmeter for alternating current EKDP7 DV voltmeter for direct current EKDP7 Hz frequency meter It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure direct current and alternating current quantities. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz * Inlet signal: - operating as voltmeter: 2 700V (the range is adjusted from inside) - operating as amperemeter: 5 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside Note: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current device and a measurement shunt for direct current. * Consumption: <5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+50C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale * Display: LCD * Weight: 130gr Mounting: * on the front panel
103
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard IEC 62052-11; IEC 62053-21; IEC 62056-21
DIN Rail Mounted kWh Meters Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy measurement. Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct measurement of the real consumption of electric power and the results are shown on the LCD display. The system doesnt need any additional adjustment or calibration. The range includes single and multi-tariff models. Technical Specifications: * Direct power consumption measurement: up to 20 (80) ; 50/60Hz * Automatic temperature compensation * LED phase voltage outage indicator. * Indication for wrong cable connection * Indication for wrong measurement * Accuracy class: 1 * Number of tariffs: see the table below * Meter constant: See the table below
Type
Measuring range
Number of Tariffs
Meter constant (imp/kWh)
Voltage (V)
Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box height / width / depth (pcs)
Catalogue number
DDS - 1Y - 45 DDS - 1Y - 100 DDS - 3Y 80
5 (45) 10 (100) 20 (80)
1 1 1
1000 1600 800
230 230 3x230/400
63 / 18 / 118 65 / 76 / 100 65 / 76 / 100
1 / 25 1 / 60 1
50214 50260 50380
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard IEC 62052-11; IEC 62053-21; IEC 62056-21
PREPAID IC card kWh meter Electronic single and three phase energy meter for active energy measurement. It can function after recharge the electricity through IC card. Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. Meter have LCD display to show Total electricity(kWh), Remain kWh, Latest kWh. This meter has infrared and RS 485 communication port. Technical Specifications: * Rated current : up to 5(80)A * Frequency: 50Hz * Impulse constant: 1000imp/kWh * Accuracy class: 1.0 * Display: LCD 6+2
Type
Measuring range
Number of Tariffs
Meter constant (imp/kWh)
Voltage (V)
Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/Box height / width / depth (pcs)
Catalogue number
DDS 1YY DDS 3YY
5 (60) 5 (80)
1 1
1000 1000
230 3*230/380
111 / 172 / 55 169 / 220 / 64
1 1
50500 50550
Programmer for IC card prepaid kWh meter Catalogue number: 50600
104
Analogue (pointer) panel meters SD72 type for build-in Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid, with overall dimensions 72x72mm. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge measurement schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes of measuring.
Type
Type of the measurment system
Precision class
Range
Note
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter voltmeter * frequency meter** cos meter amperemeter DC amperemeter DC voltmeter DC voltmeter DC wattmeter wattmeter wattmeter
MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMC MEMC MEMC MEMC MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
0-40 0-100 0-200 0-400 0-600 0-1000 0-1500 0-500V 45-65Hz 3P 400V 0-5A 0-50A 0-50V 0-100V 0-3000W 1P240V 0-3000W 3P 3 line 0-3000W 3P 4 line
current transfer 100/5 current transfer 200/5 current transfer 400/5 current transfer 600/5 current transfer 1000/5 current transfer 1500/5 outer resistor 60mV -
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 20 1 / 25 1 / 25 1 / 25
50118 654010 654020 654040 654060 654100 654150 50125 50126 50127 50128 50129 50130 50131 50132 50133 50134
Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC magnetic-electrical movable coil * Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding ** Possibility for voltage 110V, 230V , 400V
105
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Limit switches
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They feature a vibration-resistant metal shell. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series CSA-xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V Type of the * Rated current: up to 10A contact system * Protection degree: IP66 * Cable input: cable glandPG11 (4) (3) NO NO * Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm2 (1) (2) NC NC * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type Type of the Power of Power of Switching General head starting release position movement Rated current Packing/Box Catalogue (pcs) number
CSA - 001
metal cylinder
800g
400g
2.0mm
5.8mm
10-active 10 / 90 4-inductive
46001
Type
Type of the Power of Power of Switching General head starting release position movement
Rated current
Packing/Box Catalogue (pcs) number
cylinder CSA - 003 with metal roll
800g
400g
2.0mm
5.8mm
46003
Type
Rated current
horizontal CSA - 012 lever with metal roll
800g
400g
2.0mm
5.8mm
46012
Type
Rated current
adjustable CSA - 031 lever with 400g metal roll
100g
22.5
95
46031
Type
Rated current
CSA - 021
lever with metal roll
400g
100g
22.5
95
46021
Type
Rated current
CSA - 081
spring lever
150g
50g
22.5
50mm
46081
108
The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series TZ-6xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Contact resistance: 15m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000 Type of the * Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s contact system * Rated voltage: 230V * Protection degree: IP65 NC COM * Cable input: cable gland PG11 NO * Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm2
Power Switching General of position movement release
Type
Type of the head
Power of starting
Rated current
Packing/ Catalogue Box (pcs) number
TZ-6001
metal cylinder
350g
115g 0.5mm 5.5mm
15-active 1 / 50 5A-inductive
466001
Type
Type of the head
Power of starting
Rated current
TZ - 6101
oil-resistant metal cylinder
800g
240g
2mm
5mm
466101
Type
Type of the head
Power of starting
Rated current
oil-resistant TZ - 6102 cylinder with metal roll
500g
100g
1mm
3.5mm
466102
Type
Type of the head
Power of starting
oil-resistant horizontal TZ - 6104 lever with metal roll
Rated current
640g
230g
5mm
6mm
466104
Type
Type of the head
Power of starting
oil-resistant vertical lever TZ -6143 with metal roll
Rated current
640g
230g
5mm
6mm
466143
Type
Type of the head
Power of starting
Rated current
TZ - 6106
spring lever
150g
20
1 / 50
466106
109
Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or for setting the movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable terminals. They can work at resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have high accuracy and can operate at wide variety of speeds. Items are compliant with the following standards: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 Universal Limit Switch Series CM-1xxx * Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC * Insulation Resistance: 100m min. (at 500VDC) * Contact Resistance: 5m * Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with non-inductive load Type of the * Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000 contact system * Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/minute * Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s NC COM * Rated voltage: 230V NO * Degree of protection: IP65 * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type Type of the Power of head starting Power Switching General of position movement release Rated current Packing/ Catalogue Box (pcs) number
CM - 1307
Metal cylinder
350g
114g 0.4mm
5.5mm
468105
Type
Type of the Power of head starting
Cylinder and transCM - 1309 350g verse metal roll
Rated current
114g 0.4mm
5.5mm
468106
Type
Rated current
Cylinder - 1308 longitudinal metal roll
350g
114g 0.4mm
5.5mm
468109
Type
Rated current
- 1305
Metal cylinder
350g
114g 0.4mm
1.6mm
468110
Type
Rated current
CM -1703
Extended metal roll
160g
22g
7.1mm 1.02mm
468113
Type
Rated current
CM - 1705
Spring lever
10g
3g
20mm
5.6mm
468117
110

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series TZ-8xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100M * Contact Resistance: 25m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 000 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V * Protection degree: IP40 Type of the * Cable input: cable gland PG11 contact system * Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm (4) (3) NO NO * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
NC (1) (2) NC
Type
Type of the Power of Power Switching General head starting of release position movement
Rated current
TZ - 8104
lever with plastic 750g roll
100g
20
50
468104
Type
Rated current
adjustable lever with TZ - 8108 750g plastic roll
100g
20
50
468108
Type
Rated current
cylinder TZ - 8112 with metal 900g roll
150g
1.5mm
4.0mm
468112
Type
Rated current
TZ - 8111
metal cylinder
900g
150g
1.5mm
4.0mm
468111
Type
Rated current
TZ -8107
metal rod
750g
100g
20
50
468107
Type
Rated current
TZ - 8167
spring lever
150g
30mm
468167
111

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength and resistance to oil, water and pressure. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series CWL-xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Contact resistance: 15m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000 * Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V * Protection degree: IP66 Type of the * Cable input: cable gland contact system * Metal shell (4) (3) NO NO * Vibration-resistant
NC (1) (2) NC
Type
Power Power Switch- General Type of the of start- of ing movehead ing release position ment
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CWLD
metal cylinder
2720g 910g 2.0mm 6.4mm
46LD
Type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CWLD2
cylinder 10-active with metal 2720g 910g 2.0mm 5.6mm 1 / 50 3-inductive roll
46LD2
Type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CWLCA2-2
lever with metal 1360g 227g roll
20
50
46LCA2-2
Type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
adjustable CWLCA12-2-Q lever with 2720g 910g metal roll
20
50
10-active 1 / 50 46LCA12-2-Q 3-inductive
Type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CWLCA32-41 CWLNJ
fork
1200g
55 9010 28mm
10-active 1 / 50 3-inductive 10-active 1 / 50 3-inductive
46LCA32-41 46LNJ
oil-resistant 150g spring lever
Type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CWLCL
metal rod
142g
28g
20
50
46LCL
112
Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems with high safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while the safety key is mounted to the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full interlocking is achieved. Safety key interlock switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load, 3A lamp load and 5A inductive load. They have high operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit switches are available in two versions depending on the operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC Items are compliant with the following standards: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 Universal Limit Switch Series CZ93-xx Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC Insulation Resistance: 100m min. (at 500VDC) Contact Resistance: 25m Type of the Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non-inductive load contact system Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000 Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/minute Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s Rated voltage: 230V Degree of protection: IP65
Type
Key type
Power of Power of Switching General starting release position movement
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CZ-93BPG01 CZ93-K1 CZ-93CPG01 CZ93-K1
147N 147N
29.4N 29.4N
6 mm 6 mm
28mm 28mm
46CZ08 46CZ09
Type
Key type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
147N 147N
29.4N 29.4N
6 mm 6 mm
28mm 28mm
46CZ10 46CZ11
Type
Key type
Rated current
Packing/ Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
147N 147N
29.4N 29.4N
6 mm 6 mm
28mm 28mm
46CZ12 46CZ13
Type
Key Actuating
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CZ 93 - K 1 CZ 93 - K 2 CZ 93 - K 3
Horizontal Vertical Adjustable
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100
46CZ931 46CZ932 46CZ933
113
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Proximity sensor
Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. All-purpose proximity switch series LM xx * Insulating resistance: 50 M * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25 to +70 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 67
Type
12 35 45
Object
LC circuit
Switch
Terminal repeater
Catalogue number
Start Min. size of distance object
Power Type of Type of Output Packing / supply transition contact load Box (pcs) voltage
EL-LM8-3002NA 2 mm 8 8 1 24 VDC EL-LM8-3002NB 2 mm 8 8 1 24 VDC EL-LM8-3002PA 2 mm 8 8 1 24 VDC EL-LM8-3002PB 2 mm 8 8 1 24 VDC

M8x1
NPN NPN PNP PNP
NO 130 mA 2 / 200 NC 130 mA 2 / 200 NO 130 mA 2 / 200 NC 130 mA 2 / 200 NO 150 mA 2 / 200
46LM 8-32NA 46LM 8-32NB 46LM 8-32PA 46LM 8-32PB 46LM 8-22A
Catalogue number
EL-LM8-2002A 2 mm 8 8 1 230 VAC SCR

EL-LM8
17 4 50 15
Type
Start Min. size of distance object
EL-LM12-3004NA 4 mm 15 15 1 24 VDC EL-LM12-3004NB 4 mm 15 15 1 24 VDC

15
NPN NPN PNP PNP
NO 200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34NA NC 200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34NB NO 200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34PA NC 200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34PB NO 300 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-24A
Catalogue number
M12x1
58 8 4
17
EL-LM12-3004PA 4 mm 15 15 1 24 VDC EL-LM12-3004PB 4 mm 15 15 1 24 VDC
M12x1
EL-LM12-2004A 4 mm 15 15 1 230 VAC SCR

Type Start Min. size of distance object
30 55
70
M18x1
EL-LM12
30
EL-LM18-3008NA 8 mm 18 18 1 24 VDC EL-LM18-3008NB 8 mm 18 18 1 24 VDC EL-LM18-3008PA 8 mm 18 18 1 24 VDC EL-LM18-3008PB 8 mm 18 18 1 24 VDC
NPN NPN PNP PNP
Catalogue number
70 60 10 30
M18x1
27 42
60
EL-LM18-2008A 8 mm 18 18 1 230 VAC SCR

27 8
60 42
M22x1,5 M22x1,5
EL-LM22-3010NA 10 mm 22 22 1 24 VDC EL-LM22-3010NB 10 mm 22 22 1 24 VDC EL-LM22-3010PA 10 mm 22 22 1 24 VDC

50 4 15
NPN NPN PNP PNP
Catalogue number
EL-LM18
17
EL-LM22-3010PB 10 mm 22 22 1 24 VDC
EL-LM22-2010A 10 mm 22 22 1 230 VAC SCR

M12x1
58 8 4 15
17
EL-LM12-4002A 2 mm 15 15 1 230 V inductive NO 100 mA 2 / 200 EL-LM12-4004A 4 mm 15 15 1 230 V inductive NO 300 mA 2 / 200
Start Min. size of distance object Power Type of Type of Output Packing / supply transition contact load Box (pcs) voltage
46LM 12-44A 46LM 12-46A

Catalogue number
M12x1
30 55
70
M18x1
Type
30 10 30
70 60
EL-LM22
M18x1
4
EL-LM18-4006A 5 mm 18 18 1 230 V inductive NO 100 mA 1 / 100 EL-LM18-4008A 8 mm 18 18 1 230 V inductive NO 300 mA 1 / 100
46LM 18-44A 46LM 18-48A
114
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Capacitive sensors

Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. Capacitive sensors series CM xx * Insulating resistance: 50 M * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 15 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25 to +70 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 54
General scheme of a capacitive transducer
EL-CM12
Object
Inductive surface
RC generator
Switch
Output amplifier stage
17
Type
Start distance
Power sup- Type of Type of Output ply voltage transition contact load
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL-CM12-3004NA 0~4 mm
58 8 4 15
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
NPN NPN PNP PNP
NO NC NO NC
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Packing / Box (pcs)
46CM 12-32NA 46CM 12-32NB 46CM 12-32PA 46CM 12-32PB

Catalogue number
EL-CM12-3004NB 0~4 mm EL-CM12-3004PA 0~4 mm EL-CM12-3004PB 0~4 mm

Type Start distance
M12x1
EL-CM18
30 55
70
EL-CM18-3008NA 0~8 mm EL-CM18-3008NB 0~8 mm EL-CM18-3008PA 0~8 mm EL-CM18-3008PB 0~8 mm EL-CM18-2008A

Type
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR
NO NC NO NC NO
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Packing / Box (pcs)
46CM 18-38NA 46CM 18-38NB 46CM 18-38PA 46CM 18-38PB 46CM 18-28A
Catalogue number
M18x1
30 10 30
70 60
0~8 mm 230 VAC

Start distance
M18x1
EL-CM24-3012NA EL-CM24-3012NB EL-CM24-3012PA EL-CM24-3012PB EL-CM24-2012A
8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm
Start distance
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR
NO NC NO NC NO
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Packing / Box (pcs)
46CM 24-12NA 46CM 24-12NB 46CM 24-12PA 46CM 24-12PB 46CM 24-12A
Catalogue number
EL-CM24
30 55 75
30 8
75 47
M24x1,5 M24x1,5
Type
EL-SM12-3110NA EL-SM12-3110NB EL-SM18-3110PA EL-SM18-3110PB
10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm
Start distance
NPN NPN PNP PNP
NO NC NO NC
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
2 / 200 2 / 200 1 / 100 1 / 100

Packing / Box (pcs)
46SM 12-31NA 46SM 12-31NB 46SM 18-31PA 46SM 18-31PB

Catalogue number
EL-SM12
17 4 35
Type
EL-XM18-305PMI EL-XM18-305PMU
Note: Sensor of Hal
65 50
M12x1
5 mm 5 mm
24 VDC inductive NO 24 VDC inductive NC
100 mA 100 mA
1 / 100 1 / 100
46XM 18-35A 46XM 18-35B
30
Type
Start distance
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL-XM24-308PMI EL-XM24-308PMU
Note: MI - current type MU - voltage type
8 mm 8 mm
24 VDC inductive NO 24 VDC inductive NC
300 mA 300 mA
1 / 100 1 / 100
46XM 24-38A 46XM 24-38B
M18x1
EL-XM18
115
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Photoelectrical sensors

Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation inside the sensor there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.
EL-G12
Technical features: * Insulating resistance: 50 M * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25 to +70 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Ratedl voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 67
Type
Truth beam type
Start Power sup- Type of distance ply voltage transition
Type of contact
Type of sensor
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL-G18
Emitter Receiver
EL-G12-3A07NA 70 mm 24 VDC EL-G12-3A07PA 70 mm 24 VDC EL-G12-3B1NA 1m 24 VDC EL-G12-3B1PA 1m 24 VDC EL-G12-3C3NA 3m 24 VDC EL-G12-3C3PA 3m 24 VDC
Type
NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP
12; l=50 Diffuse 12; l=50 Diffuse 12; l=50 Reflector 12; l=50 Reflector 12; l=50 Truth beam 12; l=50 Truth beam
Type of contact Type of sensor
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Packing / Box (pcs)
46G12A071 46G12A072 46G123B11 46G123B12 46G123C11 46G123C12

Catalogue number
Reflector type
EL-G30
Emitter Receiver
Type
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Packing / Box (pcs)
46G18A101 46G18A102 46G183B11 46G183B12 46G185C11 46G185C12

Catalogue number
Object
Diffuse type
EL-G35
EL-G30-3A70NA 500 mm EL-G30-3A70PA 500 mm EL-G30-3B3NA 3m EL-G30-3B3PA 3m EL-G30-3C101NA 10 m EL-G30-3C101PA 10 m

Object
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 52 1 / 52

Packing / Box (pcs)
46G30A101 46G30A102 46G303B11 46G303B12 46G305C11 46G305C12

Catalogue number
Emitter
Type
EL-G50 Type
NO NO NO NO NO NO
Type of contact
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Type of sensor
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 50 1 / 50

Packing / Box (pcs)
46G35A101 46G35A102 46G353B11 46G353B12 46G355C11 46G355C12

Catalogue number
Type
NO NO NO NO NO NO
Type of contact
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Type of sensor
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 50 1 / 50

Packing / Box (pcs)
46G50A101 46G50A102 46G503B11 46G503B12 46G505C11 46G505C12

Catalogue number
EL-BZJ
EL-BZJ-211 EL-BZJ-311 EL-BZJ-411
10 mm 24 VDC Reflector 9mm 24 VDC Reflector 9mm 24 VDC Reflector
NO NO NO
Colour detector 1 / 50 Colour detector 1 / 50 Colour detector 1 / 50
46BZJ211 46BZJ311 46BZJ411
116
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Float switches / Power supplies
Float switches Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed units for direct pump control. They are intended for continuous liquid level maintenance in pools, tanks or ponds exercised through direct control of the pumping in or out process in the respective reservoir. They are pre-wired and depending on the chosen configuration can control either the pumping in, or pumping out of the reservoir. They allow direct control of single phase pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. Float switches are waterproof. The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx series are intended for mounting on pumping control panels. They do not use any additional sensors, but conductive probes to contact the liquid. The unit sends low (harmless) voltage signals to the probes and once a contact between a probe and liquid is established, the unit changes its contactors state. Units are available in three variants with different number of control contacts suitable for different applications. Each contact can transfer current of up to 5A, which is enough to ensure control over the powerful pumps contactors or to directly control pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. The automatic level control units can be installed on a DIN rail.
QW - 70AB
Type Number of Output Load probes (No. of Accuracy (A) levels) Operating Voltage (V) Note Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
DHC1Y - S DHC1Y - SD DHC1Y - T
1 3 1
5 5 5
1% 1% 1%
230 230 230
2 pumps control
100 100 100
46DW001 46DW002 46DW003
Type
Number of Output Load probes (No. of Accuracy (A) levels)
Operating Voltage (V)
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
QW - M 15 - 3
QW - M 15 - 3 QW - 70AB
2 2
6 4
1% 1%
230 230
1 / 30 1 / 20
46DW004 46DW005
Power supplies The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage reduction and rectification units ideally suited to provide stable power supply of systems and equipment for contact-free movement monitoring elements (such as inductive, capacity and photo sensors, logic elements and systems, etc.). They have small overall dimensions and can be installed on a DIN rail. The power units have metal or plastic cases resistant to vibrations and plastic oil- and waterproof covers. They are able to provide stable output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage. Devices have built-in overload and short circuit protection, allowing short time overload of up to 130%. Power supplies are available with various output voltages (5, 12, 15 and 24 V DC) and different output power rates. Technical Specifications: * Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC * Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output voltage * Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output power * Terminals: Input 2 screw terminals; Output: 4 screw terminals; * Protection level: IP44 * Power indicator * Installation: DIN rail * Cooling: Free air cooling convection
Type
Output Voltage (V)
Output Load Tolerance (A)
Power (W)
Dimensions W/H/L (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
DR - 45 -5 DR - 45 - 12 DR - 45 - 15 DR - 45 - 24
5 12 15 24
5 3.5 2.8 2
2% 1% 1% 1%
25 42 42 48
78 / 93 / 56 78 / 93 / 56 78 / 93 / 56 78 / 93 / 56
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 45 1 / 16
46DR455 46DR4512 46DR4515 46DR4524
Type
Output Voltage (V)
Output Load Tolerance (A)
Power (W)
Dimensions W/H/L (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
DR - 75 -12 DR - 75 - 24 DRP - 240 - 24
12 24 24
6.3 3.2 10
2% 1% 1%
75 75 240
55.5 / 125.3 / 100 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 125.5 / 125.3 / 100
1 / 18 1 / 18 1 / 12
46DR7512 46DR7524 46DR2424
117
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Rotary switches

Rotary switches LW26 series The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated current from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is realized through turning of the handle to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are special rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors, electric welding machines and other consumers. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3-1 Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz * Insulation voltage: 690V * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V * Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +50C * Humidity: 35 85% RH * Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to the tables * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * IP code: - IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a panel - IP65 for the breakers offered in a box * Cable connection: screw joining * Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N * Maximum section of the power supply conductors: according to the dimensions table * Weight: according to the number of the contacts Mounting: * directly to the control panel * thickness of the surface to which it is mounted: max 5mm
Dimensions
Dimensions Front panel Joining conductor (mm2) Overall dimensions (mm) B C L a Mounting dimensions (mm) b d1 d2
LW26-20
M1 panel M1 panel with inscription field
1x2.5
48 48
48 60 48 64 64 88 88
43 43 45.2 58 66 84 88
22 + 9.6n 22 + 9.6n 23+12.8n 29.2 + 12.8n 29.2 + 21.5n 35 + 26.5n 35 + 32.5n
36 36 36 48 48 68 68
36 36 36 48 48 68 68
8.5 8.5 8.5 10 10 13 13
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6 6
LW26-25 LW26-32 LW26-63 LW26-125 LW26-160

* n - number of modules
M1 panel M2 panel M2 panel M3 panel M3 panel
1x4.0 1x6.0 1x16 1x35 1x50
48 64 64 88 88
118

Packing / Box (pcs)
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Catalogue number
LW26 - 10Q LW26 - 16Q LW26 - 20Q LW26 - 25Q LW26 - 32Q LW26 - 63Q LW26 - 125Q LW26 - 160Q Q10 three-poles switching on; motor starting and stopping; voltage turning on/off to the consumers
10 16 20 25 32 63 125 160
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 72 1 / 64 1 / 24 1 / 27
492101 492161 492201 492251 492321 492631 492951 492961
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26GS - 20/04 LW26GS - 25/04 LW26GS - 32/04 LW26GS - 63/04
Q11 three-poles switching over; motor starting and stopping; voltage turning on/off to the consumers; possibility for access control
20 25 32 63
2 2 2 2
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 72 1 / 64
492207 492257 492327 492637
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 20N LW26 - 25N LW26 - 32N LW26 - 63N LW26 - 125N LW26 - 160N N11 3-position 2 start positions and 1 stop; for motor reversing
20 25 32 63 125 160
3 3 3 3 3 3
1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 64 1 / 48 1 / 24 1 / 18
492202 492252 492322 492632 492952 492962
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 25S LW26 - 63S LW26 - 125S LW26 - 160S
S19 3-position 2 start positions and 1 stop; for two speed motor control; switching over between charging*
25 63 125 160
4 4 4 4
1 / 100 1 / 48 1 / 24 1 / 18
492253 492633 492953 492963
Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging
119

Packing / Box (pcs)
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Catalogue number
LW26 - 25 SD LW26 - 63 SD
S21 3-position switching on star/delta
25 63
4 4
1 / 100 1 / 48
492025 492063
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 32H 5881/3 LW26 - 63H 5881/3
H5881/3 85 for welding transformer windings switching over
32 63
3 3
1 / 64 1 / 48
492324 492634
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 20 YH5/3
YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching over
20
1 / 72
492205
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 20 LH3/3
LH3/3 - 58 for amperemeter switching on to current transformers
20
1 / 100
492206
Type
Scheme
Ingress protecting rating
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 20-25-Q LW26 - 32-Q LW26 - 20-25-DIN
Box for LW26-20/25 Box for LW26-32 Adaptor for DIN-rail for LW26-20/25
IP 42 IP 42
1 / 76 1 / 30 15 / 1500
492037 492038 492039
120
Type
Scheme
In (A) Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
0 7 6 5 4 3 1 2
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LW26 4.I7168/7 4.I7168/7
20
1 / 100
492028
4.I7168/7
9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Type
Scheme
In (A) Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
7 6 5 4
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
4.H6518/5
LW26 4.H6518/5 4.H6518/5 25
1 / 100
492029
Type
Scheme
In (A) Levels
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW30-20-100A ON/OFF switch 3 poles
LW30-20 LW30-32 LW30-40 LW30-63
LW30-20 LW30-32 LW30-40 LW30-63
20 32 40 63
3 3 3 3
1 / 32 1 / 32 1 / 32 1 / 32
492030 492031 492033 492034
L1
L2
L3
* Possibility for access control
T1
T2
T3
Type
Ingress Scheme protecting In (A) Levels rating
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW30-20-100A ON/OFF switch 3 poles
L1
LW30-32 LW30-32 IP54 32 3 1 / 30 492032
L2
L3
* Possibility for access control
T1
T2
T3
121
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Buttons and LED indicators
Buttons and LED indicators These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in industrial automation systems. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 Technical data: * Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; * Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC) * Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit * Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation cycles * Power of mechanical compression: - at closing: 20N - at opening: 8N * Operating temperature: -20 - +70C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm * Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2 Mounting: * to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: max 4mm * opening with size: 22.5mm
Type of contacts Rated current () at 400V Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
Type
Description
Colour
Note
EL 2- BA 21 EL 2- BA 31 EL 2- BA 51 EL 2- BA 61 EL 2- BA 42 Button round with spring reverse
NO NO NO NO NC
6 6 6 6 6
black green yellow blue red
20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 300
401021 401031 401051 401061 401042
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Rated current () at 400V
Colour
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- B 31 EL 2- B 42
Button round with spring reverse
NO NC
6 6
green red
IP=65 20 / 300 Provided from silicon lid IP=65 20 / 300 Provided from silicon lid
401032 401043
122
Type
Description
Voltage for the Rated current indicator () at 400V
Colour
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671 EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671 EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671
Button round with spring reverse and LED indicator
24V 24V 24V 24V 110V 110V 110V 110V 230V 230V 230V 230V
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
red green yellow blue red green yellow blue red green yellow blue
20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200 20 / 200
401474 401374 401574 401674 401473 401373 401573 401673 401471 401371 401571 401671
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Rated current () Colour at 400V
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- BD 21 EL 2- BD 33
Switch with arrest Switch with arrest
1NO 2N
6 6
black black
two-position three-position
20 / 200 20 / 200
401421 401433
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- B 42
Button with head mushroom type
1N
red
spring reverse
15 / 150
401642
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- BS 545
Button with head mushroom type
1N + 1NO
red
release with spinning
15 / 150
401545
123
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- BW8475
Button double
1NO+1N
Green and red button + LED indicator
20 / 200
401845
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Note
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL 2- BG 21
Change-over switch with switch
1NO
two-position with switch
20 / 200
401121
Type
Description
Un
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
AD56-22-W-230 AD56-22-W-110 AD56-22-W-24 AD56-22--110 AD56-22--24 AD56-22--230 AD56-22-G-230 AD56-22-G-110 AD56-22-G-24 AD56-22-B-230 AD56-22-B-110 AD56-22-B-24 AD56-22-Y-230 AD56-22-Y-110 AD56-22-Y-24 AD56-22-R-230 AD56-22-R-110 AD56-22-R-24
LED indication
230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC
white white white amber amber amber green green green blue blue blue yellow yellow yellow red red red
10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 500
401123 401111 401124 401211 401224 401223 401323 401311 401324 401523 401511 401524 401723 401711 401724 401423 401411 401424
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL02 - B101 EL02 - B102
1 2
1 NO 1 NC
green red
100 / 1000 100 / 1000
401001 401002
124
Ingress Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the protecting contact L H W rating Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
Type
Description
Colour
EL1-B134
switching on 0-1
IP44
68
68
50
1 NO
black
1 / 100
401134
Type
Description
Ingress Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the protecting contact L H W rating
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL1-B102
1 button with spring return
IP44
68
68
50
1 NO
green
1 / 100
401102
EL1-BP102
1 button with spring return
IP65
68
68
50
1 NO
green
1 / 100
401132
Type
Description
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL1-B213
2 buttons with spring return
IP44
104
68
50
1 NC 1 NO
1 - red 1 - green
1 / 100
401213
EL1-BP213
IP65
104
68
50
1 NC 1 NO
1 - red 1 - green
1 / 100
401233
Type
Description
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL1-B339
IP44
134
68
50
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC 1 NO
1 - green 1 - red 1 - green 1 - green 1 - red 1 - green
1 / 50
401339
EL1-BP339
IP65
134
68
50
1 / 50
401349
Type
Description
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EL1-B174
Emergency button with head mushroom type 40. Release through turning
IP44
68
68
50
1 NC
red
1 / 100
401174
125
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail
These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and panels directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. There are also designed buttons combined with lamps. Technical data: * Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; * Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC) * Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit * Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons combined with indicators): <20mA * wear resistance (indicators): >2000h * Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 commutation cycles * Power of mechanical compression: - at closing: 20N - at opening: 8N * Operating temperature: -20 - +70C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm * Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance Mounting: * to a DIN-rail * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type Description Rated current (A) at 400V Type of the contact Colour Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
71 -0.43 660.37 49.50.31
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-5-1 t
350.5
450.31
ELB - BL - DIN ELB - BL - DIN ELB - G - DIN ELB - G -DIN ELB - Y - DIN ELB - Y - DIN ELB - R - DIN ELB - R - DIN
button button button button button button button button
<10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10
2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC
black black green green yellow yellow red red
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
401505 401506 401507 401508 401509 401510 401512 401513
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated current (A) at 400V
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ELD - G - DIN ELD - R - DIN ELD - Y - DIN ELD - B - DIN ELD -W - DIN
lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp
230V 230V 230V 230V 230V
<20 <20 <20 <20 <20
green red yellow blue white
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
401500 401501 401502 401503 401504
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated current (A) at 400V
Type of the contact
Colour
Packing / Box Catalogue number (pcs)
ELBD - G - DIN ELBD -G - DIN ELBD - R - DIN ELBD - R - DIN ELBD - Y - DIN ELBD - Y - DIN
button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp
230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V
<20 <20 <20 <20 <20 <20
2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC
green green red red yellow yellow
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240
401514 401515 401516 401517 401518 401519
126
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Devices for telpher control
Devices for telpher control MBP type They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are connected directly to the operating cable of the telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65. Technical data: * Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Consumed power: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 +40C * Dampness: 35 85% RH * Number of contacts: according to the number of the buttons * Commuting capacity: up to 6A * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * IP code: IP65 * Weight: according to the number of the contacts Mounting: * directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane)
stop button type button type one-speed (x81) or two-speed (x91) number of buttons
Number of buttons Contact block and scheme Emergency For the directions Packing / Box (pcs)
Type
Catalogue number
MBP-A281 MBP-A291 two-speed MBP-A2813 MBP-A2813 MBP-A2913 two-speed MBP-A481 MBP-A491 two-speed MBP-A4813 MBP-A4813 MBP-A4913 two-speed MBP-A681 MBP-A691 two-speed MBP-A6813 MBP-A6813K MBP-A6913 two-speed MBP-A881 MBP-A891 two-speed MBP-A8813 MBP-A8813K MBP-A8913 two-speed
2 2 2+1 2+1 2+1 4 4 4+1 4+1 4+1 6 6 6+1 6+1 6+1 8 8 8+1 8+1 8+1
emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button
NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
46281 46291 46283 46283K 46294 46481 46491 46483 46483K 46493 46681 46691 46683 46683K 46693 46881 46891 46883 46883K 46893
127
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Warning lights and towers
Warning lights and towers The revolving warning lights and towers are devices intended for use as status indicators in the human-machine control systems. They are suitable for installation on control cabinets and panels or directly on machines. They are manufactured in different color combinations to attract attention of operators working in a given production sector. Warning lights and towers are widely used in almost any industrial branch. They can be mounted on movable components or such, creating potential danger and can warn all workers for a critical situation with their blinking light and siren. These devices are electrically connected through cables, protruding out of the lamp casing. Technical Specification: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60 Hz; * Isolation voltage: 660V; 50/60 Hz; * Impulse voltage stability: 6000V * Rated power: see the tables below * Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse * Operating Temperature: - 20OC + 70OC * Humidity: 35 85% RH * Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not considered as being harmful to human health Installation: * Warning lights are fixed to the respective machine body with the studs protruding from the light plastic casing.
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
Colour
LTE1101 - R LTE1101 - G LTE1101 - Y LTE1101J - R LTE1101J - G LTE1101J - Y LTE1101 - R LTE1101 - G LTE1101 - Y LTE1101J - R LTE1101J - G LTE1101J - Y
Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light + siren Warning light + siren Warning light + siren Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light + siren Warning light + siren Warning light + siren
12 12 12 12 12 12 230 230 230 230 230 230
10 10 10 11 11 11 8 8 8 9 9 9
Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow
1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30
401525R 401525G 401525Y 401526R 401526G 401526Y 402525R 402525G 402525Y 402526R 402526G 402526Y
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
Colour
LTE1161 - R LTE1161 - G LTE1161 - Y LTE1161 - R LTE1161 - G LTE1161 - Y
Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light
12 12 12 230 230 230
35 35 35 28 28 28
Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow
1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
401527R 401527G 401527Y 402527R 402527G 402527Y
128
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Warning lights and towers
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
Colour
LTA205 - 1 LTA205 - 2 LTA205 - 3 LTA205 - 3J LTA205 - 5 LTA205 - 1 LTA205 - 2 LTA205 - 3 LTA205 - 3J LTA205 - 5
Tower / flashing Tower / flashing Tower / flashing Tower / flashing + siren Tower / flashing Tower / flashing Tower / flashing Tower / flashing Tower / flashing + siren Tower / flashing
12 12 12 12 12 230 230 230 230 230
4 8 12 12 18 6 8 10 11 14
1 - Red 2 - Red/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ Blue/Transparent
1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20
401528 401529 401530 401531 401532 402528 402529 402530 402531 402532
1 - Red 2 - Red/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ Blue/Transparent
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
Sound level (dB) Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
MS-290A MS-290B
metal siren plastic siren
230 230
60 60
100 100
1 / 24 1 / 10
401533 401541
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
MS-390
siren
230
160
120
1 / 50
401534
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
CB-4 CB-4 CB-4 CB-4
alarm bell alarm bell alarm bell alarm bell
12 24 110 230
85 85 85 85
1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50
401535 401536 401537 401538
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated Power (W)
FA-01
fire alarm
230
1 / 50
401540
129
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Security sensors

Motion Infrared Sensor ST 07 Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre. Once the sensor detects movement within the detectors range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. Applications: * Lights switching on at motion detection. * Security system activation at motion detection. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Rated Load:1200W * Detection Range: 360 * Reach: 6 m (max. <24) * Light Control: <10Lux * Time Setting: 5 sec., 1 min, 5 min, 8 min * Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s * Operating Temperature: - 20 C ~ 40 C * Humidity: < 93% RH Installation: ceiling mounting
Type Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
ST 07
1 / 50
46DS400
Motion Infrared Sensor ST 01 Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre or to sound effects. Once the sensor detects movement within the detectors range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. Applications: * Lights switching on at motion detection. * Security system activation at motion detection. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Rated Load: 500W * Detection Range: >140 * Reach: 12m (max. <24) * Detection System:infrared radar * Light Control : < 2Lux~1000Lux * Time Setting: from 5 sec to 9 min * Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s * Sound control sensitivity: adjustable 30db ~ 90dB * Installation: wall mounting 0.4~1.8m; mounting into round console box for concrete and brick * Humidity: < 93% RH
Type Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
ST 01
1 / 100
46DS402
Motion Infrared Sensor ST 08 Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre or to sound effects. Once the sensor detects movement within the detectors range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. The sensor is intended for outdoor use. Applications: * Lights switching on at motion detection. * Security system activation at motion detection. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Rated Load:1200W * Detection Range:180 * Reach: 12 m (max. <24) * Detection System:infrared radar * Light Control:< 3Lux ~ daylight * Time Setting: 5 sec to 8 min * Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s Type Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number * Degree of Protection: IP44 * Operating Temperature: - 20 C ~ 40 C ST 08 1 / 50 46DS403 * Humidity: < 93% RH * Installation: 0.5 ~ 3.5 m
130
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Security sensors

Smoke Alarm ST82 Smoke alarm with photoelectric sensor. Whenever the sensor detects presence of smoke in the room as a result of fire, the photoelectric sensor sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the alarm. Applications: * Fire alarm activation at detecting smoke in the room. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Output Load:10 mA * Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m) * Operating Temperature: - 10 oC ~ 40 oC * Humidity: < 93% RH * Low Voltage Alarm: 5.5V~6.2V * Support Battery: 7 ~ 15 days * Installation: ceiling mounting
Type
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ST 82
46DS404
Smoke Alarm ST85-2 Smoke alarm with photoelectric sensor. Whenever the sensor detects presence of smoke in the room as a result of fire, the photoelectric sensor sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the alarm. Suitable for incorporation in building fire and security systems. Applications: * Fire alarm activation at detecting smoke in the room. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 12/24 V DC * Output Load:17 mA * Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m) * Operating Temperature: - 5 oC ~ 40 oC * Humidity: < 93% RH * Installation: ceiling mounting
Type
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ST 85-2
46DS405
131
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Bases for high power safety devices
Bases for high power safety devices Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60269-1 The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links.
Base type
Overall dimensions (mm) 1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 C2 d
SIST00 SIST 0 SIST1 SIST2 SIST3
25 25 25 25 25
100 150 175 200 210
120 170 200 225 250
30 30 30
30 30 58 60 60
25 37 38 38 40
60 72 84 100 105
7.5 7.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current ()
Weight (gr)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SIST00 SISP00
N 00 NT 00
up to 160 up to 160
600 600
193 215
5 / 120 5 / 120
12001 12001
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current ()
Weight (gr)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SIST0 SISP0
N 0 NT 0
up to 160 up to 160
600 600
295 319
3 / 54 3 / 54
12010 12010P
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current ()
Weight (gr)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SIST1 SISP1
N 1 NT 1
up to 250 up to 250
600 600
550 550
3 / 36 3 / 36
12100 12100P
132
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Fuse links for high power safety devices
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current ()
Weight (gr)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SIST2 SISP2
N 2 NT 2
up to 400 up to 400
600 600
770 810
1 / 20 1 / 20
12200 12200
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current ()
Weight (gr)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
SIST3 SISP3
N 3 NT 3
up to 630 up to 630
600 600
965 987
1 / 15 1 / 20
12300 12300P
Fuse links for high power safety devices The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are distinguished with high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading terminals. These terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of knives to provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to gL gG class which means that they are with common function and normal response time. NH Fuses Two operating classes of NH Fuses are available: * Operating class gL/gG general purpose, line protection, slow acting * Operating class aM fast acting, suitable for motor overload and short circuit protection Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: 120 kAeff * IP code: IP 00 * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Base type
Overall dimensions (mm) B C D H
NT00 NT 0 NT1 NT 2 NT 3
78 125 135 150 150
40 68 68 68 68
15 15 21 27 33
29 29 48 58 67
56.5 56.5 62 72 84.5
133
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Fuse links for high power safety devices
Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number class gL-gG
NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600
3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120 3 / 120
Packing / Box (pcs)
10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10008 10009 10012 10016
Catalogue number class gL-gG
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0 NT0
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600
3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90
10015 10025 10032 10040 10050 10063 10080 10090 10092 10096
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
NT1 NT1 NT1 NT1 NT1 NT1 NT1
80 100 125 160 200 225 250
500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600
3 / 54 3 / 54 3 / 54 3 / 54 3 / 54 3 / 54 3 / 54
10108 10110 10112 10116 10120 10122 10125
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
NT2 NT2 NT2 NT2 NT2
160 200 250 315 400
500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600
1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30
10216 10220 10225 10231 10240
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
NT3 NT3
500 630
500,600 500,600
1 / 24 1 / 24
10350 10363
134
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Isolating switches
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3
Designed in two types horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage isolating switch and high power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution boards and complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and convenience at fuse links change. The plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous circuits switching on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolating switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and improves the safety of the staff. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted fuse links * Number of poles: 3 * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP code: IP 40 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Base type
Overall dimensions (mm) B C D E
THB -160 THB - 250 THB - 400 THB - 630

THB
105 185 210 256
160 220 260 270
85 111 130 140
45 66 88 94.5
100 180 205 245
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Fuse link size
THB THB THB THB
160 250 400 630
500, 660 500, 660 500, 660 500, 660
NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
1 / 18 1/6 1 /4 1/4
44801 44802 44803 44804
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Fuse link size
HG2B HG2B HG2B HG2B
160 250 400 630
500, 660 500, 660 500, 660 500, 660
NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4
44805 44806 44807 44808
HG2B
135
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Switch disconnector
The series of switch disconnectors are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of inflammable plastics adapted for mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric arc. LED indicator is mounted on the front panel to show fuse link condition. In this ceramic body is mounted melting, specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with especially laid nickel layer and contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. There are offered two types of insertions according to the degree of quick operation: normally quickly operating ones class gG and over quickly operating ones class aR. Suitable for DC system. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Insulation voltage: >2500V * Rated current on short-circuit: 100 * Direct mounting to the load * Two insulated points to the load * Protection rate: IP 44 * Cross-section of the supply conductors: up to 35mm2 * Environmental temperature: -5 to +55 * Utization category: AC - 20B DC - 20B * Altitude: up to 2000m
Overall dimensions
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60269-2; IEC269-2
Base type
Number of poles
Rated curType of the fuse rent ( )
Base dimensions (mm) A B C D E
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
1PRT18 - 32x 1NRT18 - 32x 2PRT18 - 32x 3PRT18 - 32x 3NRT18 - 32x 1PRT18 - 63x 1NRT18 - 63x 2PRT18 - 63x 3PRT18 - 63x 3NRT18 - 63x
Type of the fuse class gG
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
32 32 32 32 32 63 63 63 63 63
Voltage (V)
xxG1038 xxG1038 xxG1038 xxG1038 xxG1038 xxG1451 xxG1451 xxG1451 xxG1451 xxG1451
Rated current ( )
80 80 80 80 80 103 103 103 103 103
82 82 82 82 82 105 105 105 105 105
18 36 36 54 72 27 54 54 81 108
60 60 60 60 60 80 80 80 80 80
78 78 78 78 78 110 110 110 110 110
12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 6 / 108 6 / 108 6 / 108 6 / 108 6 / 108
10RT1831 10RT18311 10RT1832 10RT1833 10RT18331 10RT1861 10RT18611 10RT1862 10RT1863 10RT18631
Size of the fuse A x B x C
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
01G1038 02G1038 04G1038 06G1038 10G1038 16G1038 20G1038 25G1038 32G1038 40G1451 50G1451 63G1451
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 38x10.3x10mm 51x14.3x12mm 51x14.3x12mm 51x14.3x12mm
10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 2000 10 / 1000 10 / 1000 10 / 1000
10G10381 10G10382 10G10384 10G10386 10G103810 10G103816 10G103820 10G103825 10G103832 10G145140 10G145150 10G145163
136
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Bell for DIN rail
Bell Used for sound signalization in housing and industrial buildings. * Sound level: 70 dB Consumption: -3.6VA for power supply 8 -12V -5VA for power supply 230V * Mounting on DIN-rail
Type
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
Bell Bell
8-12 230
1 / 17 170 1 / 17 170
5012 5220
Bell transformer Modified for power supply of bells and other signal devices with alternating voltage 8V, 12V, 24V and capacity up to 3.8A. * The voltage of the primary winding voltage is 230V * Mounting on DIN-rail
Type
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
Bell transformer
1 / 80
5001
137
Electrical switches and sockets
RHYME
Packing: 10/100 pcs Rated Current: 10A Type 1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch White metallic 11011 11021 Champagne metallic 11012 11022 Gold metallic 11013 11023 Grey metallic 11014 11024 Graphite metallic 11015 11025 Coffee metallic 11016 11026
Packing: 10/100 pcs Rated Current: 10A Type 2 buttons 1 way switch White metallic 11041 Champagne metallic 11042 Gold metallic 11043 Grey metallic 11044 Graphite metallic 11045 Coffee metallic 11046
Packing: 10/100 pcs Rated Current: 10A Type door bell switch White metallic 11181 Champagne metallic 11182 Gold metallic 11183 Grey metallic 11184 Graphite metallic 11185 Coffee metallic 11186
Packing: 10/100 pcs Power: 500W Type dimmer switch White metallic 11191 Champagne metallic 11192 Gold metallic 11193 Grey metallic 11194 Graphite metallic 11195 Coffee metallic 11196
Packing: 10/100 pcs Rated Current: 16A Type German type socket French type socket White metallic 11211 11211F Champagne metallic 11212 11212F Gold metallic 11213 11213F Grey metallic 11214 11214F Graphite metallic 11215 11215F Coffee metallic 11216 11216F
140
Packing: 10/100 pcs Type TV socket White metallic 11251 Champagne metallic 11252 Gold metallic 11253 Grey metallic 11254 Graphite metallic 11255 Coffee metallic 11256
Packing: 10/100 pcs Type Phone socket White metallic 11261 Champagne metallic 11262 Gold metallic 11263 Grey metallic 11264 Graphite metallic 11265 Coffee metallic 11266
Packing: 10/100 pcs Type Computer socket
White metallic 11281
Champagne metallic 11282
Gold metallic 11283
Grey metallic 11284
Graphite metallic 11285
Coffee metallic 11286
Packing: 10/100 pcs Type Key card power switch White metallic 11331 Champagne metallic 11332 Gold metallic 11333 Grey metallic 11334 Graphite metallic 11335 Coffee metallic 11336
Packing: 20/200 pcs Type Double panel White metallic 11551 Champagne metallic 11552 Gold metallic 11553 Grey metallic 11554 Graphite metallic 11555 Coffee metallic 11556
Packing: 15/150 pcs Type Triple panel White metallic 11661 Champagne metallic 11662 Gold metallic 11663 Grey metallic 11664 Graphite metallic 11665 Coffee metallic 11666
Packing: 10/100 pcs Rated Current: 10A Type Push light switch White metallic 11181C Champagne metallic 11182C Gold metallic 11183C Grey metallic 11184C Graphite metallic 11185C Coffee metallic 11186C
Packing: 10/100 pcs Rated Current: 10A Type door bell switch with name card White metallic 11181B Champagne metallic 11182B Gold metallic 11183B Grey metallic 11184B Graphite metallic 11185B Coffee metallic 11186B
141
SPLENDOR
Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Packing: single: 30/300 pcs / single with cover: 20/200 pcs / double: 20/200 pcs / triple: 15/150 pcs single 06309 single 06308 single 063012 single 06303 1629 single 06306 single 06307 single 063011 single 06305 single 06304 single 06302 single 063010 single 06301 0629
WHITE single with cover CHROME double 063110 SILVER GRAY double 06312 YELLOW double 06314 PEAR-TREE double 06315 GOLDEN double 063111 BORDO double 06317 CHERRY-TREE double 06316 BLACK single with cover ORANGE double 063112 LIGHT BLUE double 06318 DARK BLUE double 06319 triple 06329 triple 06328 triple 063212 double 06313 triple 06323 triple 06326 triple 06327 triple 063211 triple 06325 triple 06324 triple 06322 triple 063210 double 06311 triple 06321
142
Type Rated current In (A) Colour 10 white one button one way switch 10 dark grey 10 white one button two way switch 10 dark grey 10 white one button cross switch 10 dark grey Type two buttons one way switch two buttons one way switch with light two buttons two way switch Type Rated current In (A) Colour 10 white 10 dark grey 10 white 10 dark grey 10 white 10 dark grey
Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0601 10/100 1601 10/100 0602 10/100 1602 10/100 0603 10/100 1603 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0610 10/100 1610 10/100 0612 10/100 1612 10/100 0611 10/100 1611 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0616 10/100 1616 10/100 0616F 10/100 1616F Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0606 10/100 1606 10/100 0607 10/100 1607 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0605 10/100 1605 10/100 0609 10/100 1609 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0618 10/100 1618 10/100 0619 10/100 1619
Rated current In (A) Colour 16 white German type socket 16 dark grey 16 white French type socket 16 dark grey Type one button one way switch with light one button two way switch with light Type Push light switch Door bell switch with light Type Dimmer switch Fan speed switch Rated current In (A) Colour 10 white 10 dark grey 10 white 10 dark grey Rated current In (A) Colour 10 white 10 dark grey 10 white 10 dark grey Power (W) 600 600 500 500 Colour white dark grey white dark grey
Type V socket RG11 RG11
Colour white dark grey
Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0621 10/100 1621
Type Phone socket Phone socket double Computer socket Type German type socket (double) Key card power switch RG45 RG45 Rated current In (A) 16 10 10
Colour white dark grey white dark grey white dark grey Colour white white dark grey
Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 0623 10/100 1623 10/100 06232 10/100 16232 10/100 0624 10/100 1624 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10/100 10/100 10/100 0637 0633 1633
143
LIFE STYLE
Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue Colour Type Catalogue single 34604 single : 40/480 pcs single 34605 single 34603 single 34607 single 34162 single 34606 single 34608 single 34611 single 34602 single 34610 single 34609 single 34601
WHITE double 34613 CHROME double 34621 SILVER GRAY double 34622 YELLOW double 34614 PEAR-TREE double 34623 GOLDEN double 34620 BORDO double 34618 CHERRY-TREE double 34624 DARK GREY double 34619 GREEN double 34615 LIGHT BLUE double 34617 DARK BLUE double 34616 triple 34628 quadruple 34640 sixfold triple 34629 quadruple 34641 sixfold triple 34627 quadruple 34639 sixfold triple 34631 quadruple 34643 sixfold 34661 triple 34636 quadruple 34648 sixfold triple 34630 quadruple 34642 sixfold triple 34632 quadruple 34644 sixfold triple 34635 quadruple 34647 sixfold triple 34626 quadruple 34638 sixfold triple 34634 quadruple 34646 sixfold 34662 triple 34633 quadruple 34645 sixfold triple 34625 quadruple 34637 sixfold 34660
144
Packing:
double : 40/480 pcs triple : 40/480 pcs quadruple : 35/420 pcs sixfold : 35/420 pcs
Type Rated current In (A) Colour 16 white one button one way switch 16 dark grey 16 white one button cross switch 16 dark grey Type one button two way switch one button two way switch with light Type Rated current In (A) Colour 16 white 16 dark grey 16 white 16 dark grey
Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20501 4 / 48 / 960 21501 4 / 48 / 960 20579 4 / 48 / 960 21579 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20506 4 / 48 / 960 21506 4 / 48 / 960 20507 4 / 48 / 960 21507 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20510A 4 / 48 / 960 21510A 4 / 48 / 960 20510B 4 / 48 / 960 21510B Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20521 4 / 48 / 960 21521 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 8 / 48 / 960 20803 8 / 48 / 960 21803 8 / 48 / 960 20803A 8 / 48 / 960 21803A Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 8 / 48 / 960 20616 8 / 48 / 960 21616 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 24 / 480 20265 4 / 24 / 480 21265 4 / 24 / 480 20265F 4 / 24 / 480 21265F Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20203 4 / 48 / 960 21203 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20228 4 / 48 / 960 21228 4 / 48 / 960 30301 4 / 48 / 960 31301 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 4 / 48 / 960 20251 4 / 48 / 960 21251 4 / 48 / 960 20266 4 / 48 / 960 21266 Packing (pcs) Catalogue number 10 / 2000 20056 10 / 2000 21056
Rated current In (A) Colour 10 white door bell switch with light 10 dark grey 10 white push light switch with light 10 dark grey Type curtain switch Rated current In (A) Colour 10 white 10 dark grey Power (W) 500 500 500 500 Power (VA) 8 8 Colour white dark grey white dark grey Colour white dark grey
Type dimmer switch fan speed switch
Type bell 230V Type
Rated current In (A) Colour 16 white German type socket 16 dark grey 16 white French type socket 16 dark grey Type Italian standard multi socket Type TV socket Satellite socket Type phone socket computer socket RG 11 RG 11 RG 45 RG 45 Rated current In (A) Colour 16 white 16 dark grey Colour white dark grey white dark grey Colour white dark grey white dark grey Colour white dark grey
Type decorative cover -
145
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS Cable Trunkings and frames for Splendor and Rhyme Series
Plastic cable trunking CT2 for switches and sockets
Type PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 FOR SWITCHES AND SOCKETS PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 FOR SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
Size (mm) 100x35 100x50
Length (m) 2 2
Colour white white
Packing (m) 24 16
Catalogue number 56210035M 56210050M
146
Single side box
Type SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX SINGLE SIDE BOX
Used for cable trunking 12x12 15x10 16x16 25x16 25x25 40x16 40x25 40x40
Colour white white white white white white white white
Packing (pcs) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Catalogue number 56212222 56212222 56212222 56212222 56212222 56212222 56212222 56212222
Note: The mounting of switches and sockets should be made with additional screws - not included in the box set.
Double side box
Type DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX DOUBLE SIDE BOX
Used for cable trunking 12x12 15x10 16x16 25x16 25x25 40x16 40x25 40x40
Colour white white white white white white white white
Packing (pcs) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Catalogue number 56212223 56212223 56212223 56212223 56212223 56212223 56212223 56212223
Note: The mounting of switches and sockets should be made with additional screws - not included in the box set.
147
Separator
Type SEPARATOR 40 SEPARATOR 40 SEPARATOR 40 SEPARATOR 60 SEPARATOR 60 SEPARATOR 60
Lenght (m) 2 2 2 2 2 2
Used for cable trunking 60x40 80x40 100x40 60x60 80x60 100x60
Colour white white white white white white
Packing (pcs) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Catalogue number 56261111 56261111 56261111 56261112 56261112 56261112
Frames
Type FRAME SINGLE FRAME DOUBLE FRAME TRIPLE
Used for cable trunking 100x50 100x50 100x50
Colour white white white
Packing (pcs) 5 5 5
Catalogue number 562100444 562100445 562100446
148
Single Frames / Horizontal mounting - series SPLENDOR
Single / Double / Triple Frames / Horizontal mounting - series RHYME
Single Frames / Vertical mounting - series RHYME
149
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS Waterproof switches and sockets
German type socket waterproof with transparent cover
Type Single
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 120
Catalogue number 19221304
Type Double
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 60
Type Triple
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 50
150
German type socket waterproof with white cover
Type Single
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 120
Type Double
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 60
Type Triple
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 50
151
Switch - waterproof
Type One way switch One button two way switch
IP 44 44
Packing (pcs) 120 120
Catalogue number 1922130104 1922130106
Switch - waterproof
Type Two buttons one way switch
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 120
Switch - waterproof
Type Push light switch/door bell switch
IP 44
Packing (pcs) 120
152
Surface mounting box - for LIFE STYLE series
Type double triple quadruple
Packing (pcs) 5 / 250 5 / 200 5 / 150
Watertight box - for LIFE STYLE series
Type triple quadruple
IP 44 44
Packing (pcs) 1 / 100 1 / 100
153
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS Frames and installation boxes for switches and sockets
Frame - for LIFE STYLE series
Type double frame triple frame quadruple frame sixfold frame
Packing (pcs) box / carton 10 / 400 10 / 400 10 / 400 10 / 200
Catalogue number 24262 24201 24202 24206LF
* Single switch or socket use triple frame
Console box for brick and concrete - for LIFE STYLE series
Type triple quadruple sixfold
Packing (pcs) 10 / 300 10 / 200 10 / 200
* Single, double and triple swich or socket use triple console
Console box for plasterboard
Type triple quadruple
Packing (pcs) 160 150
154
* Single, double and triple swich or socket use triple console
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS Waterproof junction boxes
Waterproof junction boxes

Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable installations laying. Made of ABS material with openings for input - output conductors, with rubber gasket to provide the corresponding IP rate. Resistant to chemical, thermal and UV rays. Direct wall mounting with screws. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60670-1 Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Material: ABS * IP rate: IP 44/54
Box type WB50/50 WB80/50 WB85/85/50 WB100/100/70 WB150/110/70 WB150/150/70 WB200/100/70 WB200/155/80 WB255/200/80 WB300/250/120 WB400/350/120
Box dimensions (mm) D 50 80 L 85 100 150 150 200 200 255 300 400 W 85 100 110 150 100 155 200 250 350 H 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 80 80 120 120
Gasket dimensions (mm) d 22.5 22.5 22.5 30 28 35 35 35 35 35 35 C 17 17 18.5 23 23 29 29 29 29 29 29
Ingress protection rating IP 44 44 44 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54
Packing / Box 320 240 200 100 60 56 60 40 30 10 5
Catalogue number 8070 8071 8072 8073 8076 8074 8075 8077 8078 8079 8080
155
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS Industrial plugs
Industrial plugs and sockets HT/HTN type

Made of special high quality plastic with alloys against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60309 and provide reliable connection and high protection level against electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are designed for surface or flush mounting, movable or fixed type. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP rate: IP 44/67 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m * Plugs and sockets: 6h
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2
a b
Model HT-013 HT-023
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 121 / 84 / 53 138 / 92 / 63 Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 121 / 84 / 51 138 / 92 / 63 230 / 109 / 36 295 / 124 / 50
Ingress protection rating IP 44 44 Ingress protection rating IP 44 44 44 44
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 100 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT-014 HT-024 HT-034 HT-044
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Poles 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 100 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 2 / 10
Catalogue number 37014 37024 37034 37044
Model HT-015 HT-025 HT-035 HT-045
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Poles 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 129 / 92 / 62 149 / 97 / 70 230 / 109 / 36 295 / 124 / 50
Ingress protection rating IP 44 44 44 44
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 2 / 10
Model HTN 0131 HTN 0231
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 120/71/12 150/93/17
Ingress protection rating IP 67 67
Packing/Box 1 / 60 1 / 40
158
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS Fixed industrial plugs
Model HTN 0141 HTN 0241 HTN 0341 HTN 0441
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 125/79/12 150/93/17 230/109/36 230/109/36
Packing/Box 2 / 60 2 / 40 10 10
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 133/87/12 155/99.5/17 230/109/36 295/124/50
Packing/Box 2 / 60 2 / 40 10 10
Fixed industrial plugs
Model HT-513 HT-523
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b 121/79 131/83
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT 514 HT 524
In (A) 16 32
Poles 3P+E 3P+E
Un (V) 400 400
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT 515 HT 525 HT 535
In (A) 16 32 63
Poles 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E
Un (V) 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 123/79 132/84 132/84
Ingress protection rating IP 44 44 44
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
159
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS Fixed industrial sockets for surface mounting
b
58 70.5
13
32.5
a
0 2
34 5 Pg21
Model HT-113 HT-123
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b 126 / 86 141 / 97
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT-114 HT-124 HT-134 HT-144
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 132 / 91 141 / 96 193 / 122 220 / 140
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 2 / 10
Model HT-115 HT-125 HT-135 HT-145
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 129 / 96 141 / 98 193 / 122 220 / 140
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 2 / 10
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 101/150/93.5 114/162/93.5
160
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS Movable industrial sockets for surface mounting
Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 104/150/93.5 116/162/93.5 171/170/230 171/170/230 Dimensions (mm) a /b /c 107/150/93.5 116/162/93.5 171/170/230 171/170/230 Ingress protection rating IP 67 67 67 67 Ingress protection rating IP 67 67 67 67 Catalogue number 37741 37641 37842 37844
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Packing/Box 2 / 40 2 / 40 1 / 10 1/6
Model HTN 1151 HTN 1251 HTN 1351

b
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Packing/Box 2 / 40 2 / 40 10 6
HTN 1451
Movable industrial sockets for surface mounting
Model HT-213 HT-223
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b 130 / 96 149 / 90
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 100 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT-214 HT-224 HT-234 HT-244
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 131 / 96 149 / 90 230/109 290/124
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 100 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 2 / 10
Model HT-215 HT-225 HT-235 HT-245
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 139 / 90 154 / 100 230/100 290/124
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 2 / 10
161
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS Movable industrial sockets for surface mounting
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 131/76 149/90 271/115 295/137
Packing/Box 2 / 60 2 / 40 10 6
In (A) 16 32 63 125
Un (V) 400 400 400 400
Dimensions (mm) a /b 139/90 154/100 240/112 300/126
Packing/Box 2 / 60 2 / 40 10 6
162
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS Industrial sockets for flush mounting Industrial sockets for flush mouting
Model HT-413 HT-423
In (A) 16 32
Poles 1P+N+E 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230 230
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT-414 HT-424
In (A) 16 32
Poles 3P+E 3P+E
Un (V) 400 400
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT-415 HT-425
In (A) 16 32
Poles 3P+N+E 3P+N+E
Un (V) 400 400
Packing/Box 2 / 10 / 60 2 / 10 / 60
Model HT-105SR
In (A) 16
Poles German type
Un (V) 230
Dimensions (mm) a /b 70/70
Ingress protection rating IP 44
Packing/Box 500
Model 213L-2P-W
In (A) 16
Poles 1P+N+E
Un (V) 230
Cable length (mm) 450
Ingress protection rating IP 44
Packing/Box 48
163
DISTRIBUTION BOXES Distribution boxes with industrial sockets
Distribution boxes with industrial plugs and sockets and protection device section
They are specially designed distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets fabric cabled with possibility for protection devices mounting (breakers, residual current devices). They are designed for building sites mounting, industrial projects for power supply of mobile movable consumers, exhibition centers, outdoor concerts or repair- reconstruct operations with temporary character. The boxes are made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60529 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 400V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted safety fuses and residual current devices * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Power supply cable: 5x2.5mm2 * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP rate: IP 44 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m * Overall dimensions of the box: 136x94x425 mm Inlet power supply conductor (mm2) 32.5 52.5 32.5 3x2.5 Packing / Box 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2; EN 60 529
Type EDB 100 - 401 EDB 100 - 402 EDB 200 - 401 EDB 100 - 501*
Outlets 3 sockets 16A 1P+N+E 1 sockets 16A 3P+N+E and 2 sockets 16A 1P+N+E 3 sockets 32A 1P+N+E 3 sockets 16A 1P+N+E
Catalogue number 53401 53402 53421 53501*
Note: * The distribution box is supplied with extension cable with section 3x2.5mm2 and length 1.5m
166
DISTRIBUTION BOXES Plastic distribution boxes
Plastic distribution boxes for surface mounting

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP rate IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3 Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * fire resistance rate: UL 94 * IP rate: IP 40 * Class of current limiting: 2
Number of rows 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
Module capacity (number of devices) 4 6 8 12 18 24 36
Terminal strips number 2 2 2 3 4 6 8
Openings number 9 9 14 17 25 34 43
Dimensions (mm) L 110 150 190 260 365 270 310 W 205 205 205 205 220 330 475 H 75 75 75 75 75 75 85
Packing / Box 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5
Catalogue number 60040 60060 60080 60120 60180 60240 60360
167
Plastic distribution boxes for flush mounting

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal blocks for the neutral and grounded conductor joining. Mounted through building-in in openings on the wall under plaster or in plasterboard (through special brackets). Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * fire resistance rate: UL 94 * IP rate: IP 40 * Class of current limiting: 2
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Number of rows 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
Module capacity (number of devices) 4 6 8 12 18 24 36
Terminal strips number 2 2 2 3 4 6 8
Openings number 9 9 14 17 25 34 43
Dimensions (mm) L 110 150 190 260 365 270 310 W 205 205 205 205 220 330 475 H 75 75 75 75 75 75 85
Packing / Box 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5
Note: For plasterboard mounting should be used special brackets (4 pcs. set, catalogue number 60085, general packing - 10 sets). catalogue number 60085
168
Moisture-proof distribution boxes for surface mounting - IP 55

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white non-self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP rate IP 55. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. For direct wall moutining with screws. Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 209; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3 Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * fire resistance rate: UL 94 * IP rate: IP 55 * Class of current limiting: 2
Type WP4 WP6 WP8 WP12 WP18 WP24
Number of rows 1 1 1 1 1 2
Module capacity (number of devices) 4 6 8 12 18 24
Terminal strips number 2 2 2 3 4 6
Openings number 9 9 14 17 25 34
Dimensions (mm) L 127 162 216 270 378 340 W 214 214 214 214 233 288 H 93 93 93 93 93 93
Packing / Box 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 12 1/8 1/8
169
DISTRIBUTION BOXES Metal distribution boxes
Stainless steel metal boxes

Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output conductors, grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of single stainless steel sheet. The mouting plate is treated with anti-corrosion and decorative powder coating. They are used in case of special requirements regarding the exposure of corrosion. Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Maximum current: up to 800A * Material: stainless steel * IP rate: IP 55 Mounting: * vertically on flat surface
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Type SXF 25/25/15 SXF 30/25/15 SXF 40/30/20 SXF 50/40/20 SXF 60/40/20 SXF 70/50/20 SXF 80/60/25 SXF 100/80/30 SXF 120/80/30
Thickness of metal sheet (mm) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5
Metal box dimensions (mm) L (height) 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 W (width) 250 250 300 400 400 500 600 800 800 H (depth) 150 150 200 200 200 200 250 300 300
Packing / Box 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Catalogue number 54025 54030 54040 54050 54060 54070 54080 54100 54120
170
DISTRIBUTION BOXES Metal distribution boxes
Metal distribution boxes

Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output conductors, grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of single steel sheet, treated with decorative powder coating. Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Maximum current: up to 1250A * Material: steel * RAL 7032 * Coating: powder style painting * IP rate: IP 55 Mounting: * vertically on flat surface
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Type JXF 25/25/15 JXF 25/30/15 JXF 30/25/15 JXF 30/40/20 JXF 40/30/20 JXF 40/50/20 JXF 40/40/20 JXF 50/40/20 JXF 40/60/20 JXF 60/40/20 JXF 60/60/20 JXF 70/50/20 JXF 80/60/25 JXF 100/80/30 JXF 120/80/30 JXF 140/80/30 JXF 180/80/30 JXF 180/100/30*
Thickness of metal sheet (mm) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Metal box dimensions (mm) L (height) 250 250 300 300 400 400 400 500 400 600 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1800 1800 W (width) 250 300 250 400 300 500 400 400 600 400 600 500 600 800 800 800 800 1000 H (depth) 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 250 300 300 300 300 300
Nominal working current In (A) 80 100 100 160 160 250 250 250 250 250 250 350 400 630 630 800 1000 1250
Packing / Box 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Catalogue number 53025 53026 53030 53031 53040 53041 53044 53050 53051 53060 53066 53070 53080 53100 53120 53140 53188 53180
Note: *Metal boxes with double door
171
DISTRIBUTION BOXES Metal distribution boxes Electric Switchboards with Type-Approval Certificates
The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following metal and plastic electric control boxes and boards with ELMARK automation: -Tower Mounted Switchgear - Low Voltage Meter Box - Low Voltage Main Switchboard - Distribution Switchboard - Power Compensation System
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO
Low Voltage Main Switchboard Type GRT
Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT
Power Compensation System Type CCU
Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH
172
DISTRIBUTION BOXES Plastic distribution board
Plastic distribution boards

Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines. They can also be used as meter boxes. Boards are made of polyester or ABS. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays. Technical Specifications: - Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, oils, salts, etc. - Rated Voltage: up to 690V - Maximum Current: up to 800A - Thermal Deformation: over 240C - Operating Temperature: -35C + 40C - Material: ABS - IP rate: IP65 - Colour: RAL7035 grey - Recyclable - adjustable mounting plate position Mounting: - Vertically on flat surface
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439 -1 EN 60439 -5
Board Type CP 5001 CP 5002 CP 5003 CP 5003D CP 5007 CP 5004 CP 5005
Material Type ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS
L (mm) 210 250 300 300 350 400 400
W (mm) 280 330 400 400 500 500 600
H (mm) 130 130 165 195 195 175 200
Packing / Box 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Packing / Box 1 1 1 1 1
Note: Open door angle 180
Board Type CP 5111-8modules CP 5112-18modules CP 5113-24modules CP 5114-54modules CP 5115-60modules
Material Type ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS
L (mm) 210 250 300 400 400
W (mm) 280 330 400 500 600
H (mm) 130 130 165 175 200
Catalogue number 5322128130 5322533130 5323040165 5324050175 5324060200
Note: Transperent door
Board Type CP 501 CP 503 CP 504 CP 505 CP 506 CP 508
Material Type polyester polyester polyester polyester polyester polyester
L (mm) 300 250 300 400 400 500
W (mm) 200 300 400 500 600 800
H (mm) 150 155 180 190 200 285
Packing / Box 1 1 1 1 1 1
Note: Open door angle 90
173
CABLE TERMINALS Connection tubes
Connection tubes - GTY type
Copper pipes with galvanic tin coating, used for joining of copper rigid or multicore conductors with different sections. The assembling is made by mechanical pressing with crimping tool. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: tin * Application: general Standard: EN 61 238-1
Type GTY-4 GTY-6 GTY-10 GTY-16 GTY-25 GTY-35 GTY-50 GTY-70 GTY-95 GTY-120 GTY-150 GTY-185 GTY-240
Length L (mm) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Outer diameter D (mm) 5 5.3 6.3 7.5 9 10.8 12.5 14.5 17 19 21 23 26
Inner diameter d (mm) 3 3.7 4.5 5.7 7.2 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.7 15 16.7 18.5 21
Cable (mm2) 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240
Packing / Box (pcs) 1000 / 16000 500 / 1500 / 12000 500 / 1500 / 12000 100 / 200 / 4800 100 / 500 / 2000 100 / 200 / 1600 20 / 200 / 1600 10 / 100 / 800 10 / 80 / 640 10 / 60 / 480 10 / 50 / 400 10 / 40 / 320 10 / 30 / 240
Catalogue number 59213 59201 59202 59203 59204 59205 59206 59207 59208 59209 59210 59211 59212
176
CABLE TERMINALS Connection tubes
Bimetallic connection tube - GTL type
Pipes made of two metals copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining copper and aluminum conductors rigid or multicore conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Standard: EN 61 238-1 Technical data: * Material: copper aluminum alloy * Coating: none * Application: general for joining of two types of conductors
Butt terminal type GTL - 16 GTL - 25 GTL - 35 GTL - 50 GTL - 70 GTL - 95 GTL - 120 GTL - 150 GTL - 185 GTL - 240
d1 5 6 7 8.5 9.5 11.5 13.5 15 17 19
D1 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 26
d2 6 7 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.5 15 17 18.5 21
D2 10 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 30
l1 30 30 30 32 38 40 42 44 46 54
l2 30 33 40 42 50 50 55 55 60 60
L 75 82 90 95 105 110 112 118 125 130
Packing / Box (pcs) 20 / 200 / 1200 20 / 400 / 1500 20 / 300 / 1000 20 / 800 10 / 600 10 / 500 10 / 400 10 / 350 10 / 300 10 / 200
Catalogue number 59214 59215 59216 59217 59218 59219 59220 59221 59222 59223
177
CABLE TERMINALS Cable terminals without insulation
Cable terminals without insulation - JM type
JM
Standard: EN 61 238-1
They are used for joining copper conductors - multicore conductors with different section to electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard length SC and extended base JM. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: tin * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices. Shoe type JM - 2.5/6 JM - 4/6 JM - 6/6 JM - 6/8 J - 10/6 JM - 10/8 JM - 16/6 JM - 16/8 JM - 16/10 JM - 25/8 JM - 25/10 JM - 35/8 JM - 35/10 JM - 35/12 JM - 50/8 JM - 50/10 JM - 50/12 JM - 70/10 JM - 70/12 JM - 95/10 JM - 95/12 JM - 120/10 JM - 120/12 JM - 150/12 JM - 185/12 JM - 185/16 JM - 240/16 d1 (mm) 2.2 3.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8 5.5 5.5 5.5 7 7 8.2 8.2 8.2 9.8 9.8 9.8 11.5 11.5 13.8 13.8 15.5 15.5 16.5 18.8 18.8 21.3 D (mm) 4.5 4.8 5.5 5.5 6.8 6.8 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 10.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 17.5 17.5 19.5 19.5 21 23.5 23.5 26.5 d2 (mm) 6 6 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 8 10 8 10 12 8 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 12 12 16 16 L (mm) 24 24 24 24 25.5 25.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 34 34 38 38 38 45 45 45 50 50 55.5 55.5 63 63 71 78 78 92 Packing / Box (pcs) 1000 / 3000 / 24000 1000 / 2000 / 16000 500 / 2000 / 16000 500 / 2000 / 16000 500 / 1500 / 12000 500 / 1500 / 12000 400 / 800 / 6400 400 / 800 / 6400 400 / 800 / 6400 250 / 500 / 4000 250 / 500 / 4000 200 / 400 / 3200 200 / 400 / 3200 200 / 400 / 3200 100 / 200 / 1600 100 / 100 / 1600 100 / 200 / 1600 80 / 100 / 1280 80 / 100 / 1280 50 / 200 / 800 50 / 200 / 800 30 / 60 / 480 30 / 60 / 480 10 / 50 / 400 10 / 40 / 320 10 / 40 / 320 10 / 30 / 240 Catalogue number 59240 59241 59035 59059 59036 59037 59038 59039 59040 59041 59042 59043 59044 59045 59046 59047 59048 59049 59050 59051 59052 59053 59054 59055 59056 59057 59058
178
CABLE TERMINALS Cable terminals without insulation
Bimetalic non-insulated cable terminals for crimping DTL

They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multicore conductors with different section to electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper aluminum * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Shoe type DTL - 1 - 16 DTL - 1 - 25 DTL - 1 - 35 DTL - 1 - 50 DTL - 1 - 70 DTL - 1 - 95 DTL - 1 - 120 DTL - 1 - 150 DTL - 1 - 185 DTL - 1 - 240
d1 (mm) 6 7 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.5 15 16.5 18.5 21
D (mm) 11 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 30
d2 (mm) 8 8 10 10 12 12 14 14 16 16
L (mm) 70 75 85 90 102 112 120 126 133 140
l (mm) 30 34 38 40 48 50 53 56 58 60
B (mm) 16 18 20.5 23 26 28 30 34 37 40
Packing / Box (pcs) 20 / 200 / 1440 20 / 180 / 1080 20 / 100 / 600 20 / 70 / 420 10 / 60 / 360 10 / 40 / 180 10 / 30 / 120 5 / 25 / 120 5 / 20 / 120 4 / 12 / 72
179
CABLE TERMINALS Insulated cable terminals
Insulated cable joints

Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors with section up to 6mm2. It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. Standard: EN 61 238-1 Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: polyvinylchloride * Application: general for joining of copper conductors
Type PVT 1.25 BV 1.25 PVT 2 BV 2 PVT 5.5 BV 5.5
Length (mm) 16 25 16 25 20 25
Colour red red blue blue yellow yellow
Conductor (mm2) 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 4-6
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 10 / 120 10 / 120 10 / 120 10 / 60 5 / 60 5 / 60
180
Insulated cable terminals - MDD/FDD types
They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with polyvinylchloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending and breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current - carrying parts. They are used for conductors with section up to 6 mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: polyvinylchloride * Application: general for joining copper conductors * Ambient temperature: -10 to +75C
Type MDD 1.25 - 187 MDD 1.25 - 250 MDD 2 - 187 MDD 2 - 250 MDD 5.5 - 250 FDD 1.25 - 187 FDD 1.25 - 187 FDD 2 - 187 FDD 2 - 250 FDD 5.5 - 250
Shape male male male male male female female female female female
Colour red red blue blue yellow red red blue blue yellow
Conductor (mm2) 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Shoe width 187 250 187 250 250 187 250 187 250 250
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 10 / 240 10 / 240 10 / 240 10 / 180 10 / 120 20 / 240 15 / 180 20 / 240 10 / 180 10 / 120
181
Insulated cable terminals - E type
Type 0508 7508 1008 1510 2512 4012 6018 10-18 16-18 25-16 35-25
Colour white blue red black grey orange green dark green milky yellow black grey-yellow
Terminal length (mm) 8 8 8 10 12 12 18 18 18 16 25
Conductor (mm2) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10 16 25 35
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 50 / 600 50 / 600 50 / 600 30 / 360 30 / 300 20 / 240 5 / 120 8 / 96 6 / 60 5 / 36 2 / 24
Insulated cable terminals - RVL type
Type RVL 1.25-4 RVL 1.25-5 RVL 2-4 RVL 2-5 RVL 5.5-4 RV 5.5-5 RV 5.5-6
Size of the opening (mm) 4 5 4 5 4 5 6
Colour red red blue blue yellow yellow yellow
Conductor (mm2) 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 4-6 4-6
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 20 / 240 15 / 180 15 / 180 10 / 120 8 / 96 8 / 96 8 / 96
182
Insulated cable terminals - PTV type
Type PTV 1.25 - 10 PTV 1.25 - 12 PTV 2 - 10 PTV 2 - 12 PTV 5.5 - 13
Shape male male male male male
Colour red red blue blue yellow
Conductor (mm2) 0.25-1.5 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Shoe width 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.9
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 20 / 240 20 / 240 20 / 240 15 / 180 8 / 96
Insulated cable terminals - PBDD type
Type PBDD 1.25 - 250 PBDD 2 - 250 PBDD 5.5 - 250
Shape male male male
Colour red blue yellow
Conductor (mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Shoe width 6.3 6.3 6.3
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 5 / 60 5 / 60 5 / 60
183
Insulated cable terminals - MPD type
Type MPD 1.25 - 156 MPD 2 - 195 MPD 5.5 - 195
Conductor (mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Shoe width 6.3 6.3 6.3
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 10 / 240 10 / 120 10 / 120
Insulated cable terminals - MDFN type
Type MDFN 1.25 - 250 MDFN 2 - 250 MDFN 5 - 250
Conductor (mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Shoe width 4 4 5
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 5 / 60 5 / 60 4 / 48
184
Insulated cable terminals - CHS type
Type CHS3 CHS4 CHS5 CHS6
Length (mm) 18.1 20.1 25.5 27.3
Conductor (mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 8
Packing (pcs.) 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 250 200 200 100
Insulated cable terminals - FDFNY type
Type FDFNY FDFNY FDFNY
Length (mm) 250 250 250
Conductor (mm2) 1,25 2 5,5
Packing / Box (pcs.) 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs.) 10 / 60 10 / 60 10 / 60
185
ACCESSORIES Voltage transformers
EVT5 - control voltage transformer

Functions: Reduction of main voltage within standard range * Galvanic separation of the power supply circuit from the operation circuit Technical features: * Input voltage: 400 or 230 V * Output voltage: See the table on the next pge * Frequency : 50/60Hz * Short circuit resistance: unstable * Temperature class: (130C) * Construction: open (for installation in other products) * Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel * Coils: pure electrotechnical copper * Protection degree: IP20 Connection: * flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to terminals Mounting: * Mounting in distribution boards or products * fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface * position: vertical * ambient temperature: -20 +40
F C
188
ACCESSORIES Voltage transformers
Type EVT5 - 100VA EVT5 - 100VA EVT5 - 100VA EVT5 - 100VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 -1000VA EVT5 -1000VA EVT5 - 1000VA EVT5 - 1000VA EVT5 - 1000VA EVT5 - 1000VA EVT5 - 1600VA EVT5 - 1600VA EVT5 - 1600VA EVT5 - 1600VA EVT5 - 1600VA EVT5 - 1600VA
Initial voltage (V) 230 400 230 400 230 230 400 400 230 400 230 230 400 400 230 400 230 400 230 230 400 400 230 400 230 230 400 400 230 400
Secondary voltage (V) 48-36 48-36 24-12 24-12 48-24-12 48-36 48-24-12 48-36 24-12 24-12 48-24-12 48-36 48-24-12 48-36 24-12 24-12 110-48-24 110-48-24 48-24-12 48-36 48-24-12 48-36 24-12 24-12 48-24-12 48-36 48-24-12 48-36 24-12 24-12
Power VA 100 100 100 100 250 250 250 250 250 250 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
Dimensions C 84 84 84 84 130 130 130 130 130 130 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 170 170 170 170 170 170 190 190 190 190 190 190 D 90 90 90 90 100 100 100 100 100 100 113 113 113 113 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 E 63 63 63 63 120 120 120 120 120 120 133 133 133 133 133 133 133 133 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 F 65 65 65 65 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 G 95 95 95 95 130 130 130 130 130 130 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 155 155 155 155 155 155 170 170 170 170 170 170 d 4 4 4 4 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Packing / Box (pcs.) 16 16 16 16 16 16 12 12 12 12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Catalogue number 45248 45448 45243 45443 45242 45242N 45442 45442N 45244 45444 45245 45245N 45445 45445N 45246 45446 45215 45415 45241 45241N 45441 45441N 45247 45447 452416 452416N 454416 454416N 452417 454417
189
ACCESSORIES German type socket for DIN rail mountin
German type socket for DIN rail mounting
German type socket for DIN rail mounting It provides plug presence in electric boards and easy cabling. * Supply voltage: 230V * Computing option: up to 16 * Operation temperature: from -10 up to +40 * Humidity: up to 85%RH Mounting method: * DIN rail
Type German type socket for DIN rail
Packing / Box (pcs) 5 / 100
190
ACCESSORIES Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers
Supply busbar
Functions: * enables the supply of a group of conductors * provides simultaneous supply * conducting section electrotechnical copper * insulation of the conducting section Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V * Isolating voltage: 500V * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960/3sec. * Rated current (phase): 63/100A Connecting: * to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type (copper busbar) 1P 63 1P 100 2P 63 3P 63 3P 100 DP 1N C100 1P C100 2P C100 3P U 1P 63 U 2P 63 U 3P 63 U 4P 63
Length (m) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Poles (number) 54 54 28 18 18 56 54 28 18 13
In with one point of power supply 63 100A 63A 63 100A 63A 125A 125A 125A 63A 63A 63A 63A
In with two points of power supply 90 120A 90A 90 120A 90A 150A 150A 159A 90A 90A 90A 90A
Packing / Box (pcs) 20 / 100 20 / 100 10 / 50 6 / 30 5 / 50 10 / 50 20 / 100 10 / 50 5 / 20 20 / 100 10 / 50 6 / 30 5 / 20
Catalogue number 14163 14190 14263 14363 14390 14463 14190T 14290T 14390T 14163U 14263U 14363U 14463U
191
Mounting (DIN) rail

Functions: * serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements * provides a firm fixation of the elements Technical data: * brass alloy with galvanic cover * factory drilled mounting openings * length up to 1m Connecting: - with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface
Length (m) 1m
Insulating mounting terminal - TB25

Functions: * provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm2 to power supply busbar * provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker * provides enough contact surface of the conductor Technical data: * Brass alloy with galvanic cover * Fabric isolated with plastic cover * Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables * Rated voltage: 230V * Rated current: up to 63A * Isolating voltage: 500V * IP rate: IP>20 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm2 Connecting: * to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type TB 25
Section of the conductor (mm2) 2.5 to 35
Rated current In (A) 63
192
Terminal plates for MCCB - DS1 type
Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals and providing excellent contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different cross section are available depending on the switch rated power. Mounting: Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base. Type P 125 TP 160 TP 250 TP 400 TP 630 TP 800 TP 1250 Rated current () 125 160 250 400 630 800 1250 Packing (pcs.) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Catalogue number 31125 31160 31250 31400 31630 31850 311250
193
ACCESSORIES Consumatives
Cable glands PG type
Standard: EN 60 423; 48580-81
Plastic pipes supplied with the corresponding gaskets and nuts. Designed to provide necessary IP rate on the points where conductors pass through the walls of the electric distribution boxes. All cable gland elements are made of high quality plastic (PE) and rubber. Technical data: * Material: polyethylene (PE) * Colour: gray * Application: general * Ambient temperature: -40 to +85C * IP rate: IP 55
Type PG-7 PG-9 PG-11 PG-13.5 PG-16 PG-19 PG-21 PG-25 PG-29 PG-36 PG-42 PG-48
Overlapping field 3.5-6.8 5-8 6-10 7-12 8-14 9-17 10-18 15-22 16-24 18-28 26-36 32-39
T (mm) 16.3 18.9 21.7 23.6 26.5 29 32.3 32.6 41.1 52 57.4 65.2
B (mm) 18 21.7 23.5 26.5 29.3 32 35.6 32.6 45.4 58 61.9 70.7
d (mm) 12 15.5 18.5 20 21.5 23 28 29.8 36 46 51 58
D (mm) 6.6 8.5 10.4 13 14 17 19 24 26 31.5 37.6 43
L1 (mm) 10 10 8.5 10 9 12 12 13 12.5 12.5 17.5 21
L2 (mm) 22 25 29 29 29 29 35 31 40 45 47 50
Packing / Box (pcs) 100 / 4000 100 / 4000 100 / 3000 100 / 2000 100 / 2000 100 / 2000 100 / 1000 100 / 1000 50 / 500 50 / 350 20 / 200 20 / 200
Catalogue number 500070 500090 500110 500135 500160 500190 500210 500250 500290 500360 500420 500480
194
Zero rails
They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with fabric made openings for the conductors and bolts for clamping of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and noninsulated rail. They are used in the electrical distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing. Technical data: * Material: brass for the current leading elements * Insulation material: plastic * Colour: gray/blue * Application: general * Ambient temperature: -40 to +85C
Rail type BRASS ZERO insulated
Length L (mm) 1000 250
Height H (mm) 7.8 -
Width W (mm) 6 -
D (mm) 5 5
Bolt M4 M4
Number of terminals 54 16
Packing / Box (pcs) 100 200
SP 031
Zero terminals
SP 029 Packing / Box (pcs) 10 / 500 10 / 800 20 / 300 20 / 300 20 / 250 5 / 400 5 / 400 5 / 400 5 / 400 5 / 300 Catalogue number 14204 14206 14208 14210 14212 14304 14306 14308 14310 14312
Rail type SP 029-4 SP 029-6 SP 029-8 SP 029-10 SP 029-12 SP 031-4 SP 031-6 SP 031-8 SP 031-10 SP 031-12
L (mm) 82.9.4 100.9 118.9 136.9 182.4 59.5 76.5 93 111 128
H (mm) 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
W (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12.4 12.4 12.4 12.4 12.4
C 70.5 88.5 106.5 124.5 170 48.5 65.5 82 100 117
D (mm) 70.5 88.5 106.5 124.5 170 48.5 65.5 82 100 117
M 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10
195
Support insulator for low voltage
Support insulators are used in control and distribution cabinets mounting when bars isolation is required. Provides reliable insulation of live parts. Technical Specification: * Rated voltage: 1000V * Insulating voltage: 5000 V * Ambient temperature : -40 to +90
Type SM 25 SM 30 SM 35 SM 40 SM 51 SM 76
Impulse voltage kV 6 8 10 12 15 25
Strength 500 550 600 650 1000 1500
Fasting strength 6 8 10 12 20 40
Bolt 6 8 8 8 8 10
Dimmensions (mm) H 25 30 35 40 51 76 W 30 32 32 40 50 45 a 13 10 10 10 12 16 23 27 28 33 28 34
Packing (pcs.) 10 / 600 10 / 500 10 / 400 10 / 240 10 / 240 10 / 120
196
Cable fixing clips
Type CHR-4 CHR-5 CHR-6 CHR-7 CHR-8 CHR-9 CHR-10 CHR-12 CHR-14 CHR-16
Diameter (mm) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16
Packing (pcs) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs) 500 500 300 300 250 200 200 100 50 50
PVC insulating tape
Colour Black Red Yellow / Green White Blue
Thickness (mm) 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
Width (mm) 19 19 19 19 19
Length (m) 18,28 18,28 18,28 18,28 18,28
Packing / Box (pcs) 10 / 200 10 / 200 10 / 200 10 / 200 10 / 200
197
Cable tags sets
Type EC-0-0 EC-0-1 EC-0-2 EC-0-3 EC-0-4 EC-0-5 EC-0-6 EC-0-7 EC-0-8 EC-0-9
Section (mm) 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2
Number in a roller 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Packing / Box (pcs) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Type EC-0-a EC-0-b EC-0-R EC-0-S EC-0-T EC-0-N EC-0-P EC-0- EC-0- EC-0-B EC-0-C EC-0-Q
Section (mm) 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2
Number in a roller 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Packing / Box (pcs) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Catalogue number 31800a 31800b 31800R 31800S 31800T 31800N 31800P 31800E 31800A 31800B 31800C 31800Q
Section (mm) 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2
Packing / Box (pcs) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Section (mm) 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2
Packing / Box (pcs) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
198
Section (mm) 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2
Packing / Box (pcs) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Section (mm) 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2
Packing / Box (pcs) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Section (mm) 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2
Packing / Box (pcs) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Section (mm) 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2
Packing / Box (pcs) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
199
ACCESSORIES Heat shrinkage tubes
Heat shrinkage tubes ZDG type
Standard: EN 60 684
Thin-wall heat shrinkage tubes are used for insulation of cable connection, at conductors repair to protect the cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at temperature higher than 120C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain degree. The material has high temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called permanently netted plastic. This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy electron rays so that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given cable) the crystals melt again but due to the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the cable, pressing it and not allowing the moisture to get under the pipe. Technical data: * Material: triple cross - linked polyolefin * Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, white * Shrinkage ratio: min 2 : 1 * Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100C * Shrinkage temperature: min 120C * Condition of the material during fire exposure: slight burning * The material does not emit hazardous substances * Insulation resistance: 1 10 12 /cm * Application: general * Insulating voltage 1000 V
200
ACCESSORIES Heat shrinkage tubes
Type ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG ZDG
D1 (mm) 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150
D2 (mm) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 9.0 10 11 12.5 14 15 17.5 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 75
S (mm) 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
Packing / Box (m) 200 / 4000 200 / 4000 200 / 4000 200 / 2000 100 / 1700 100 / 1200 100 / 1000 100 / 1000 100 / 1500 100 / 1500 100 / 1500 100 / 1500 100 / 1200 100 / 1200 100 / 1200 100 / 1200 100 / 1200 50 / 600 50 / 500 50 / 500 25 / 600 25 / 300 25 / 300 25 / 300 25 / 250 25 / 200 25 / 300 25 / 250 25 / 100 25 / 150 25 / 100 25 / 200 25 / 100
Catalogue number * 301001x 301115x 301002x 301003x 301004x 301005x 301006x 301007x 301008x 301009x 301010x 301011x 301012x 301013x 301014x 301015x 301016x 301018x 301020x 301022x 301025x 301028x 301030x 301035x 301040x 301050x 301060x 301070x 301080x 301090x 301100x 301120x 301150x
Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be added: B blue; R red; K - black; G - green; Y yellow;
201
ACCESSORIES Terminal blocks
Fixed terminal blocks - LTU2 UK series

Fixed terminal blocks with universal application into electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting. Variety of sizes for optimum using of available space by selection of appropriate terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.
Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1
Type LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N

"...6"
Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core 0.2-4 0.2-4 0.2-4 0.2-4 multicore 0.2-2.5 0.2-2.5 0.2-2.5 0.2-2.5
8mm
Size of the terminal (mm) L 42.5 42.5 42.5 42.5 H 47 47 47 47 W 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2
In () 32 32 32 32
Un (V) 800 800 800 800
Colour grey red black blue
Packing / Box (pcs) 50 / 3000 50 / 3000 50 / 3000 50 / 3000

"...6"
Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core 0.2-6 0.2-6 0.2-6 0.2-6 multicore 0.2-4 0.2-4 0.2-4 0.2-4
8mm
Size of the terminal (mm) L 42.5 42.5 42.5 42.5 H 47 47 47 47 W 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2
In () 41 41 41 41
Un (V) 800 800 800 800
Packing / Box (pcs) 50 / 2000 50 / 2000 50 / 2000 50 / 2000
202
Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core 0.2-10 0.2-10 0.2-10 0.2-10 multicore 0.2-6 0.2-6 0.2-6 0.2-6 L 42.5 42.5 42.5 42.5
Size of the terminal (mm) H 47 47 47 47 W 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
In () 57 57 57 57
Un (V) 800 800 800 800
Packing / Box (pcs) 50 / 1000 50 / 1000 50 / 1000 50 / 1000
"...8
10mm
Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core 0.5-16 0.5-16 0.5-16 0.5-16 multicore 0.5-10 0.5-10 0.5-10 0.5-10 L 42.5 42.5 42.5 42.5
Size of the terminal (mm) H 47 47 47 47 W 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2
In () 76 76 76 76
Un (V) 800 800 800 800
Packing / Box (pcs) 50 / 1000 50 / 1000 50 / 1000 50 / 1000
"...10
12mm
Type LTU2UIK 16 LTU2UIK 35
Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core 2.5-25 10-35 multicore 4-16 10-35 L 42.5 55
Size of the terminal (mm) H 47 62 W 12.2 15.2
In () 101 125
Un (V) 800 800
Colour grey grey
Packing / Box (pcs) 50 / 1000 20 / 400
"...10
12mm
"...10
16mm
203
Fixed terminal blocks - JD series

Two-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect groundes conductors. Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.
Standard: EN 60947-7-1
Type 5JD 6JD 10JD 16JD 35JD

"...10
Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core 0.2-4 0.2-10 0.5-10 2.5-25 2.5-35 multicore 0.2-4 0.2-6 0.5-6 2.5-16 2.5-35
16mm
Size of the terminal (mm) L 42.5 42.5 42.5 42.5 42.5 H 47 47 47 47 47 W 6.2 8.2 8.2 12.2 15
In () 34 37 61 108 135
Un (V) 800 800 800 800 800
Colour yellow-green yellow-green yellow-green yellow-green yellow-green
Packing / Box Catalogue (pcs) number 50 / 1000 50 / 1000 50 / 1000 50 / 600 20 / 400 31054 31064 31104 31164 31354
Marking tags - ZB type

Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, different voltages and fixing of elements for DIN-rail mounting.
Type ZB6 ZB8
Pieces in a strip 20 10
Colour white white
Size (mm) 6 8
Packing / Box (pcs) 100 / 1200 100 / 1200
204
End cover
Type EC
Colour grey
Thickness (mm) 8
Expanding block (connectors) for DIN rail
They are used for cable power supplies branches from one main conductor to several smaller conductors. Designed for DIN - rail mounting. Presented in different colours according to their usage (blue - null conductor, grey - phase conductor, yellow - green - earthing conductor). Easy to mount, reliable way of connection.
Main Terminal Type FVK35 FVK35 FVK35 FVK50/4 FVK50/4 FVK50/4 FVK 50/6 FVK 50/6 FVK 50/6 FVK 70/6 FVK 70/6 FVK 70/6 FVK70/8 FVK70/8 FVK70/8 Current (A) 125 125 125 150 150 150 150 150 150 192 192 192 192 192 192 Section (mm2) 35 35 35 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70
Secondary Terminal Number of terminals 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 Section (mm2) 10 10 10 16 16 16 10 10 10 2x25+4x10 2x25+4x10 2x25+4x10 10 10 10 Colour blue grey yellow-green blue grey yellow-green blue grey yellow-green blue grey yellow-green blue grey yellow-green
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number 3193541 3193542 3193543 3195041 3195042 3195043 3195061 3195062 3195063 3197061 3197062 3197063 3197081 3197082 3197083
205
Universal end fixed pieces E/UK type
Type E/UK
Colour grey
Thickness (mm) 5
Terminal blocks TBH type
Type TBH 3A TBH 6A TBH 10A TBH 15A TBH 20A
Pieces in a strip 10 10 10 10 10
In () 3 6 10 15 20
Un (V) 660 660 660 660 660
Colour semitransparent semitransparent semitransparent white white
Section of the conductor (mm2) t 1.5 t 4 t 6 t 6 t 10
Packing / Box (pcs) 100 / 1000 100 / 1000 100 / 500 100 / 500 100 / 400
206
ACCESSORIES Cable ties
Cable ties - white
Type Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties
Length (mm) 100 150 160 200 250 280 300 300 370 380 450 500
Colour white white white white white white white white white white white white
Width (mm) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.8 3.5 4.8 4.8 7.9
Packing (pcs) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs) 10 / 800 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 400 10 / 250 10 / 200 10 / 200 10 / 120 10 / 120 10 / 100 10 / 70 5 / 40
Cable ties - black
Type Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties Cable ties
Length (mm) 150 160 250 280 300 500
Colour black black black black black black
Width (mm) 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 7.9
Packing (pcs) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Packing / Box (pcs) 10 / 500 10 / 500 10 / 250 10 / 200 10 / 200 40
207
TOOLS Manual meters
Digital multimeter 5510

This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V * AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V * DC current: 400 / 4000 / 40m / 400m / 10A * AC current: 400 / 4000 / 40m / 400m / 10A * Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40M * Capacitors: 4 / 40 / 400 / 4 / 40 / 100F * Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz * Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9% * Temperature: -20 up to 1000 * Humidity: 30% to 95% * Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux * Noise level: 35 to 100dB * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 310 g (including battery) * Battery: 1x9V * Dimensions: 83 162 47mm
Type 5510
Packing (pcs) / carton 24
Digital multimeter 420C
Type 420C
This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analoguedigital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V * AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V * DC current: 200 / 2000 / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A * AC current: 00 / 2000 / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M * Temperature: -20 up to 1000 * Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 200 g (including battery) * battery: 3x1.5 V * dimensions: 75 158 35mm
210
TOOLS Manual meters
Type EM3055
This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V * AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V * DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A * AC current: 200m / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200M * Capacity: 2000p / 20 / 200 / 20F * Temperature: 0 up to 1000 * Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V * Transistor test: Vce3V , Ib10F * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 495 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 97 200 48mm
This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V * AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V * DC current: 20 / 200 / 2m / 200m / 10A * AC current: 20 / 200 / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200M * Capacitors: 2 / 20 / 200 / 2 / 20F * Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz * Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9% * Temperature: 0 up to 1000 * Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 495 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 97 200 47 mm
Type EM3058
211
TOOLS Manual meters
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication. Technical features: * DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V * AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V * DC current: 240 / 2400 / 24m / 240m / 10A * AC current: 240 / 2400 / 24m / 240m / 10A * Resistance: 240 / 2400 / 24K / 240K / 2400K / 24M * Capacity: 25 to 252F * Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 0.5 MHz * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 137 g (including battery) * battery: 2x1.5 V * dimensions: 70 126 28mm
Type EM31
Digital multimeter / pen 3215
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection, range overload indication. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication and a torch. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V * AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V * DC current: 20m to 200mA * AC current: 20m to 200mA * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M * Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 182 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 57 230 30mm
Type EM3215
212
TOOLS Manual meters
Digital clamp meter EM202
Type EM202
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 k * Temperature: -40 up to 1400 * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 400 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 99 250 43mm
Type EM204
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electromagnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * DC current: 200 / 1000A * AC current: 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 k * Frequency: 2 kHz * Circuit control: yes * Weight: 400 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 99 258 43mm
213
TOOLS Manual meters
Type EM266
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * AC current: 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 / 20 k * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 310 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 69 229 38mm
Infrared temperature meter EM520A
This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser counter for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection. Technical features: * Temperature: -20 up to 320 / -4 to 608 F * Distance to point size: 6:1 * Precision: 2 C or 2% in reading * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 90 155 45mm Type EM520A Packing (pcs) / carton 20 Catalogue number 519520
214
TOOLS Manual meters
Phase meter Gk7
A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light indication of phase availability. Technical features: * Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V * Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz * dimensions: length 62mm
Type GK7
Catalogue number 519GK7
Digital detector 4 in 1 series TS530
This is a device for detecting metals, voltage and live conductors, wooden struts, or piping sections. The device has a 2-meter measuring tape. It features light and sound indication. When an object is located, the display light blinks and marks with increasing position. Once the exact position is located, a light point is marked on the wall through a button. Packing (pcs) / carton 30 Catalogue number 519530 Technical features: * 2-meter measuring tape * Pen: marking the located detail * Piping section: metal pipe up to 25mm * Wooden struts: 30x30mm * Live conductors detection: 50mm for 90 ~ 250V; 50/60Hz * Weight: 213 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9 V * dimensions: 73 x 180 x 32mm
Type TS530
Industrial repair kit ETK06A
A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and struts for each instrument. The kit includes: Type ETK06A Packing (pcs) / carton 6 Catalogue number 51906A * Digital multimeter EM420 * Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465 * Phase meter GK7 * Infrared temperature meter EM520A
215
TOOLS Crimping tools
Hydraulic crimping pliers HT - 300 type
Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Crimping head turning at 360 which facilitates the crimping of static conductors * Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm2 - Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm2 * Element pressing power: 60kN * Width of the element: 17mm * Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg * Length: 460mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder Packing (pcs) box / carton 2 Catalogue number 59300
Type HT - 300
Hydraulic crimping pliers KYQ-300B type
Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm2 - Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm2 * Element pressing power: 16T * Width of the element: 22mm * Weight of the instrument: 6.8 kg * Length: 500mm * Used hydraulic oil: #23 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 23) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder Type KYQ-300B Packing (pcs) box / carton 2 Catalogue number 59302
216
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK-300 type
Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm2 - Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm2 * Element pressing power: 16T * Width of the element: 22mm * Weight of the instrument: 6.3 kg * Length: 500mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Type YQK-300
Packing (pcs) box / carton 4
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK 50 type
Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50 mm2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 4 to 50mm2 - Cu conductors from 4 to 50 mm2 * Element pressing power: 8T * Width of the element: 10mm * Weight of the instrument: 2.8 kg * Length: 310mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Type YQK 50
217
Hydraulic punching pliers WK - 8 type
Type WK - 8 Additional set
Packing (pcs) box / carton 2 2
Functions: * Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion Technical data: * Piercing head turning at 360 * Form of the cutting element: round * Size of the cutting element: 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm * Piercing capacity: - sheet metal 3mm openings up to 30mm - sheet metal 2mm openings up to 60mm * Element pressing power: 80kN * Thickness of the element: 25mm * Weight of the instrument: 3.5 kg * Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder * Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands 16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
Hydraulic punching press SYK 15 type
Type SYK 15 Additional set
Packing (pcs) box / carton 2 2
Functions: * Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion Technical data: * Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing openings everywhere on the metal surface * Form of the cutting element: - round - square * Size of the cutting element: - square: 32x32mm - round openings: 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm * Piercing capacity: - sheet metal 3mm openings up to 60.8mm - sheet metal 2mm openings up to 115.5mm - square opening up to 110x110mm * Element pressing power: 15T * Thickness of the element: 25mm * Weight of the instrument: 11.5 kg * Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder * Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands 16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
218
Combined scissors HS 2103 type
Functions: * Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2 * Crimping of cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of automobile high voltage conductors * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Maximum section of the cable: up to 6mm2 * Weight of the instrument: 0.21kg * Length of the instrument: 213mm * Packing: blister
Type HS 2103
Combined scissors HS 2603 type
Functions: * Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2 * Crimping of cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Maximum section of the cable: - cleaning of a rigid conductor: from 0.5 to 6mm2 - cleaning of a flexible conductor: from 0.75 to 6mm2 * Presence of openings for cutting of bolts: from M2.5 to M5 * Weight of the instrument: 0.32kg * Length of the instrument: 240mm * Packing: blister
Type HS 2603
219
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HD 005 type
Functions: * Crimping of naked cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 10mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg * Length of the instrument: 220mm * Packing: blister
Type HD 005
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors G 301H type
Functions: * Crimping of isolated cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg * Length of the instrument: 220mm * Packing: blister
Type G 301H
220
Crimping pliers SN 003 type
Functions: * Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.39kg * Length of the instrument: 190mm * Packing: blister
Type SN 003
Packing (pcs) box / carton 10 / 20
Crimping pliers HY 200R type
Functions: * Used for cleaning and crimping of 4, 6, and 8 core telephone or grid conductors * Crimping of terminals/couplings for telephone or computer grids Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors for 4, 6 or 8 cores * Weight of the instrument: 0.55kg * Length of the instrument: 200mm * Packing: blister
Type HY 200R
221
TOOLS Mechanical cutting tools
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC 325 type
Type CC 325
Packing (pcs) box / carton 5 / 10
Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 150mm2 - for copper conductors up to 150mm2 * Cutting power: 15T * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet * Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism * Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg * Length of the instrument: 260mm * Packing: blister
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC 400 type
Type CC 400
Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 400mm2 - for copper conductors up to 350mm2 * Cutting power: 15T * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet * Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism * Weight of the instrument: 1.25kg * Length of the instrument: 360mm * Packing: blister
222
TOOLS Mechanical cutting tools
Mechanical cable cutting pliers HS 250 type
Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 240mm2 - for copper conductors up to 185mm2 * Weight of the instrument: 1.43kg * Length of the instrument: 540mm * Packing: blister
Type HS 250
223
TOOLS Pliers
Manufactured to exact standards. Chrome Vanadium Steel Induction hardened cutting edges. Bi-material TPR soft-grip handle. Ergonomic design for comfortable,firm grip. GS/TUV approved.
Combination Pliers
Type Combination pliers Combination pliers Combination pliers
Size (mm) 160 180 200
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 6 / 36 1 / 6 / 36 1 / 6 / 36
Type Side cutting pliers Side cutting pliers
Size (mm) 160 180
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 6 / 36 1 / 6 / 36
Side Cutting Pliers
224
TOOLS Pliers
Long Nose Pliers
Type Long nose pliers Long nose pliers
Size (mm) 160 200
Bent Nose Pliers
Type Bent nose pliers Bent nose pliers
Size (mm) 160 200
Flat Nose Pliers
Type Flat nose pliers
Size (mm) 160
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 6 / 36
225
TOOLS Pliers
Wire Stripping Pliers
Type Wire Stripping pliers
Size (mm) 160
Side Cutting Pliers, Heavy Duty
Type Side cutting pliers
Size (mm) 180
226
TOOLS Pliers
Bent Nose Mini Pliers
Type Bent nose mini pliers
Size (mm) 115
Combination Mini Pliers

Type Combination mini pliers Size (mm) 115 Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 120 Catalogue number 592100115
Side Cutting Mini Pliers

Type Side cutting mini pliers Size (mm) 115 Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 120 Catalogue number 592200115
End Cutting Mini Pliers

Type End cutting mini pliers
Size (mm) 115
227
TOOLS VDE Pliers
VDE Combination Pliers

Type VDE Combination Pliers
Size (mm) 180
VDE Long Nose Pliers
Type VDE Long Nose Pliers
Size (mm) 180
Type
Size (mm) 160
228
VDE Side Cutting Pliers
VDE Side Cutting Pliers
TOOLS VDE Screwdrivers
Type VDE Cable Cutting Pliers
Size (mm) 160
VDE Cable Cutting Pliers
Designed for great performance with thumb pressure points. Extra torque and comfort. Chrome vanadium steel. Magnetic tip. Ergonomic comfort-grip handle.
Type VDE Screwdriver, Slotted VDE Screwdriver, Slotted
Size (mm) 3 4
L (mm) 100 100
Type VDE Screwdriver VDE Screwdriver
Size (mm) PH1 PH2
L (mm) 80 100
229
TOOLS Screwdrivers
Designed for great performance with thumb pressure points. Extra torque and comfort. Chrome vanadium steel. Magnetic tip. Ergonomic comfort-grip handle.
Type Mini Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver
Size 6 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 8
L (mm) 38 100 100 150 100 150 100 150 150
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 6 / 60
Catalogue number 593160038 593130100 593140100 593140150 593150100 593150150 593160100 593160150 593180150
230
TOOLS Screwdrivers
Type Mini Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver
Size PH2 PH0 PH0 PH0 PH1 PH1 PH1 PH2 PH2 PH3
L (mm) 38 75 100 150 75 100 150 100 150 150
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 6 / 60
Type Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver
Size PZ0 PZ1 PZ2 PZ3
L (mm) 75 100 150 150
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 6 / 60
Type Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver
Size 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 25 27 30 40
L (mm) 75 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 100 100 150
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 6 / 60
231
TOOLS Bit holders
Bit driver
Type Bit driver
Size 1/4
L (mm) 90
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 /120
Magnetic bit holder
Type Magnetic bit holder
Size 1/4
L (mm) 60
232
TOOLS Bits
Slotted bit - 25 mm
Type Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit
Size 4,0 4,5 5,5 6,0 6,5 8,0 9,0
L (mm) 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Packing hanging card (pcs) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Packing (pcs) box / carton 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500
Slotted bit - 50 mm
Type Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit Slotted bit
Size 4,0 4,5 5,5 6,0 6,5 8,0 9,0
L (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
233
TOOLS Bits
PH bit - 25 mm
Type PH bit PH bit PH bit PH bit
Size PH0 PH1 PH2 PH3
L (mm) 25 25 25 25
Packing hanging card (pcs) 2 2 2 2
PH bit - 50 mm
Type PH bit PH bit PH bit PH bit
Size PH1 PH2 PH3 PH4
L (mm) 50 50 50 50
234
TOOLS Bits
PZ bit - 25 mm
Type PZ bit PZ bit PZ bit PZ bit
L (mm) 25 25 25 25
PZ bit - 50 mm
Type PZ bit PZ bit PZ bit PZ bit
L (mm) 50 50 50 50
235
TOOLS Bits
TORX bit - 25 mm
Type TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit
Size T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T15 T20 T25 T27 T30 T40
L (mm) 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Packing hanging card (pcs) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Packing (pcs) box / carton 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500 125 / 500
236
TOOLS Bits
TORX bit - 50 mm
Type TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit TORX bit
Size T10 T15 T20 T25 T27 T30 T40
L (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
237
TOOLS Ratchets
High quality forged Chrome Vanadium Steel, Ergonomic design comfort-grip handle. Quick-release button. Flip reverse 72 teeth fine mechanism.
Type Rachet handle Rachet handle Rachet handle
Size 1/4 3/8 1/2
238
TOOLS Socket Sets
Industrial Socket Set with quick-release and flip reverse ratchet handle. Ergonomic design comfort-grip handle. Innovative storage hanger.
11pc Socket Set 1/4"
Contents: 5mm,6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, 10mm,11mm,12mm, 13mm, 14mm
Type Socket Set - 11 pcs
Size 1/4
11pc Socket Set 1/2"
Contents: 10mm,11mm, 12mm, 13mm, 14mm, 15mm,17mm, 19mm, 22mm,24mm
Type Socket Set - 11 pcs
Size 1/2
239
TOOLS Sockets
Hexagon socket 1/4
Type 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket 1/4 socket
Size 4mm 4.5mm 5mm 5.5mm 6mm 7mm 8mm 9mm 10mm 11mm 12mm 13mm 14mm
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280
Hexagon socket 3/8
Type 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket 3/8" socket
Size 6mm 7mm 8mm 9mm 10mm 11mm 12mm 13mm 14mm 15mm 16mm 17mm 18mm 19mm 20mm 21mm
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 14 / 280 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 8 / 160
Catalogue number 595400006 595400007 595400008 595400009 595400010 595400011 595400012 595400013 595400014 595400015 595400016 595400017 595400018 595400019 595400020 595400021
240
TOOLS Sockets
Hexagon socket 1/2
Type 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket 1/2" socket
Size 10mm 11mm 12mm 13mm 14mm 15mm 16mm 17mm 18mm 19mm 20mm 21mm 22mm 23mm 24mm 27mm 30mm 32mm
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 10 / 200 1 / 8 / 160 1 / 8 / 160 1 / 8 / 160 1 / 8 / 160 1 / 8 / 160 1 / 8 / 160 1 / 6 / 120 1 / 6 / 120 1 / 5 / 100 1 / 4 / 80 1 / 4 / 80
Catalogue number 595500010 595500011 595500012 595500013 595500014 595500015 595500016 595500017 595500018 595500019 595500020 595500021 595500022 595500023 595500024 595500027 595500030 595500032
241
TOOLS Wrenches
Drop Forged with hardened jaws, Ergonomic design comfort-grip handle. Smooth Runing Jaw Adjustment.
Type Adjustable wrench Adjustable wrench Adjustable wrench
Size (mm) 150 200 300
242
TOOLS Spanners
High quality forged Chrome Vanadium Steel, 15 offset as per DIN standard. Satin Chrome plated against corrosion.
Type Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner Combination Spanner
(mm) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27
L (mm) 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 320
B (mm) 15,2 17,0 18,8 20,8 22,8 24,8 26,8 28,8 30,8 32,8 34,8 36,8 38,8 40,8 42,8 44,8 46,8 48,8 50,8 56,8
D (mm) 10,8 12,0 13,2 14,6 16,0 17,3 18,6 20,0 21,4 22,8 24,2 25,6 27,0 28,4 29,8 31,2 32,6 34,4 35,4 39,6
S1 (mm) 3,7 3,8 4,2 4,4 4,7 5,0 5,3 5,6 5,9 6,2 6,5 6,8 7,1 7,4 7,6 7,8 8,0 8,2 8,5 9,4
S2 (mm) 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,0 8,5 9,0 9,5 10,0 10,5 11,0 11,5 12,0 12,3 12,5 12,8 13,0 14,5
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 180 1 / 12 / 180 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 12 / 120 1 / 6 / 120 1 / 6 / 120 1 / 6 / 90 1 / 6 / 90 1 / 6 / 90 1 / 6 / 60 1 / 6 / 60
Catalogue number 596200006 596200007 596200008 596200009 596200010 596200011 596200012 596200013 596200014 596200015 596200016 596200017 596200018 596200019 596200020 596200021 596200022 596200023 596200024 596200027
243
TOOLS Spanners
High quality forged Chrome Vanadium Steel. Satin Chrome plated against corrosion.
Type Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner Double Open Spanner
(mm) 6x7 8x9 10x11 12x13 14x15 16x17 18x19 20x22 21x23 25x28 30x32
L (mm) 120 140 155 170 185 200 220 235 245 270 295
B (mm) 17,5 22,0 26,0 30,0 34,0 38,0 42,2 48,0 50,0 59,5 67,7
D (mm) 15,4 19,5 23,5 27,6 32,0 35,3 39,5 43,5 45,8 54,0 64,0
S1 (mm) 3,5 3,9 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,4 9,0
S2 (mm) 3,6 3,6 4,6 5,3 5,4 6,3 6,3 6,8 6,9 8,3 8,6
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 300 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 180 1 / 12 / 180 1 / 6 / 120 1 / 6 / 60 1 / 6 / 48 1 / 6 / 48
244
TOOLS Spanners
High quality forged Chrome Vanadium Steel, with 75 offset ring end. Satin Chrome plated against corrosion.
Type Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner Double Offset Ring Spanner
(mm) 6x7 8x9 10x11 12x13 14x15 16x17 18x19 20x22 21x23 24x27 25x28 30x32
L (mm) 165 180 195 215 235 250 265 285 305 325 340 375
B (mm) 12,4 15,4 18,0 21,0 23,6 26,3 29,0 33,2 34,6 40,5 42,0 47,0
D (mm) 10,9 13,9 16,6 19,6 22,2 25,0 27,6 30,4 31,8 36,0 37,5 44,0
S1 (mm) 5,5 6,5 7,5 8,5 9,5 10,5 11,5 13,0 13,5 15,0 15,5 16,5
S2 (mm) 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0 11,0 12,0 12,5 14,0 14,5 16,0
Packing (pcs) hanging card / box / carton 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 12 / 240 1 / 6 / 150 1 / 6 / 150 1 / 6 / 120 1 / 6 / 90 1 / 6 / 60 1 / 6 / 60 1 / 6 / 30 1 / 6 / 30
245
TOOLS Hex Key Sets
9 pcs Hex Key Set

Chrome vanadium steel, hardened and termpered. Folding plastic tray with LED light. Satin chrome plated finish.
Contents: 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10mm
Type Hex Key Set
9 pcs Torx Key Set With Hole

Chrome vanadium steel, hardened and tempered. Folding plastic tray with LED light. Satin chrome plated finish.
Contents: T10, T15, T20, T25, T27, T30, T40, T45, T50
Type Torx Key Set with Hole
246
TOOLS Bit Sets
12 in 1 Ratchet Screwdriver and Bits Set

Ratchet screwdriver with 12 pc bits. Ergonomic handle. Window display box for easy storage and selection.
Contents: 1 pc 1/4" ratchet screwdrive handle 12 pcs CRV 1/4" Bits: 3 pcs slotted: 4.0x25mm, 5.5x25mm, 6.0x25mm 3 pcs philips: PH1x25mm, PH2x25mm, PH3x25mm 3 pcs pozi: PZ1x25mm, PZ2x25mm, PZ3x25mm 3 pcs torx: T15, T20, T25
Type 12 in 1 Rachet Screwdriver and Bits Sets
Packing (pcs) box / carton 1 / 6 / 24
247
TOOLS Saws
Cuts on the push and the pull for fine cutting. Hard point fine teeth triple ground. Ergonomic comfort-grip handle.
Type Saw
Size (mm) 400
Type Hacksaw frame
Size (mm) 300
Hacksaw Frame
Light duty with rigid square tubular frame and die-cast handle.
248
TOOLS Hammers
Reinforced Fibre glass shaft, Impact-Absorbent Soft Grip. Drop-Forged alloy steel head. Polished striking face. Ergonomic comfort-grip TPR handle.
Machinist Hammer
Packing (pcs) box / carton 1 / 6 / 24 1 / 6 / 24
Type Mechinist Hammer Mechinist Hammer
Size (g)
300 400
Rubber Mallet
Desinged to protect the workpiece where a metal hammer may cause damage. Reinforced Fibre glass shaft. Ergonomic comfort-grip TPR handle.
Type Rubber Mallet
Size (g)
450
249
TOOLS Hammers
Auto retracting safety snap off knife
Features auto retracting blade which prevents inadvertent exposure of cutting edge and subsequent injury/damage.
Type Auto retracting safety snap off knife Spare blades
Size (mm) 9 9
Snap off knife

Pull the button and cartridge backward to refill new blades. Push the button completely forward to release used blade. Soft-grip handle.
Type Snap off knife ( + 5pcs blades ) Spare blades
Size (mm) 18 18
250
TOOLS Measuring tools
Levels
Smart designed Bi-material casing, 3-rivet hook and spring return mechanism. Auto-lock blade. Strong, durable blade with magnet.
Type Tape Measure Tape Measure
Size 3 m x 16 mm 5 m x 19 mm
Robust aluminium box section with milled surfaces, comfort-grip for ease of handling, rubberised end caps. 3 accurate vials. Accurate to 0.5mm/m.
Type Level Level
Size 800 mm 1200 mm
Packing (pcs) box / carton 1 / 24 1 / 12
251
Product displays
252
Product displays
253
Product displays
254
Showrooms
255
ELMARK HOLDINGs participation in technical exhibitions
Paris, France
Livin Luce Milano, Italy
Hannover Messe, Germany
256

Katalog Elmark 2013 WEB6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Katalog Elmark 2013 WEB6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Katalog Elmark 2013 WEB6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELMARK Has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of the international

CERTIFICATES CIRCUIT BREAKERS

INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES

CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION

DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF EL. MOTORS

TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES

ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL

HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS

Certificates of the trade companies Bulgaria, Romania, Serbia

ELMARK GROUP d.o.o

Quality Management System

ISO certificates of ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Bosnia and Herzegovina

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Serbia

Certificate of Compliance GOST

Certificate for international insurance in Alliance IRIND

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2

Rated current Breaking capacity In (A) (kA)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

Rated current Breaking capacity In (A) (kA)

Recommended sections of the condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

41470 41471 41472 41473 41474 41475 41476 41477 41478

41470B 41471B 41472B 41473B 41474B 41475B 41476B 41477B 41478B

Rated current Breaking capacity In (A) (kA)

Recommended sections of the condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41541 41542 41543 41544 41545 41546 41547 41548 41549

41541B 41542B 41543B 41544B 41545B 41546B 41547B 41548B 41549B

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) 60N

constructive series number of poles (1;2;3;4) rated current breaking curve

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) 60N

Rated current Breaking In (A) capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

Rated current Breaking In (A) capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

Rated current Breaking In (A) capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the Packing/Box (pcs) condmuocutonrtsin (g/mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L